JP6070658B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a moving member formed so as to be movable by being swung by a parallel link (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-210238 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement with respect to measures against displacement of the moving member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the displacement of the moving member.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a base member, a Hijiku支means having one end portion is swingably supported on the base member, the other of its Hijiku支means The movable member is disposed at the end of the movable member and is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position that is different from the first position, and a drive that generates a driving force of the movable member. device and, in Bei obtain gaming machine, said drive device, said comprising a transmission gear for transmitting driving force to be rotatably supported means, said one end of the pivotally supported means of its one end A side surface that is formed in a circular arc shape around the swing shaft and includes a passive gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear; The transmission gear can be brought into contact with the pivot support means as it moves in the swing axis direction. Ru with a composed part.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, comprising light emitting means for emitting light.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the displacement of the moving member can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to enhance the production effect by the light emitting means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a back disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b). is there. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the XVIa-XVIa line | wire of FIG.15 (b), (b) is the variable prize-winning apparatus after sliding the movable upper cover member from FIG.16 (a). It is sectional drawing. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (b), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit along the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. (C) is sectional drawing of the board surface lower unit which changed the arrangement | positioning of the light irradiation part virtually from FIG.18 (b). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. (A) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 1st guide arm, (c) is the 1st guide arm in the XXVc-XXVc line | wire of Fig.25 (a). FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm taken along line XXVd-XXVd in FIG. (A) is a front view of the 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the 2nd guide arm, (c) is the 2nd guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of Drawing 26 (a). (D) is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm in the XXVId-XXVId line | wire of Fig.26 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, a 2nd guide arm, and wiring. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit in the XXXV-XXXV line of FIG. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit in the XXXVII-XXXVII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a side view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in the arrow XXXIIb direction view of Fig.42 (a). It is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member in the XXXIVa-XXXXIVa line of FIG. 43, a driven side arm member, and a 1st bridge member, (b) is the drive side arm in the XXXIVb-XXXIVb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member, a driven side arm member, and a 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the swing operation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXVa in FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) are diagrams in which the driven arm member is bent from the state of FIG. 45 (a) to the front side. It is a partial side view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit which showed the mode to show in time series. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the driving side arm member and the driven side arm member taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 43. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in the XXXV-XXXXV line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) is a front view of the swinging operation unit in the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the swinging operation unit along line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the combined operation unit. It is a partial front view of the compound operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LXI-LXI in FIG. 60. (A) is a front view of the 1st guide arm in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st guide arm, (c) is a perspective view of a desorption front locking member. . (A) is a front view of the 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the 2nd guide arm, (c) is the 2nd guide arm in the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of Drawing 63 (a). FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st guide arm and 2nd guide arm of a wiring guide arm, (c) is the 1st of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing of a guide arm and a 2nd guide arm.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 50, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into a receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer time than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done. The details of the variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a will be described later. Briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable prize winning device 330 slides to move the specific prize winning opening 65a. Opened and closed.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. A sphere that flows down the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. A pair of out ports 314 are arranged on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 433, 462, 551 and solenoid 474.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the housing structure of the units 400 and 500 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The left and right and upper outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 in the middle in the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b capable of fastening a member to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the near side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the end opposite to the opening 211a of the intermediate wall portion 212a, and on the back side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is the intermediate wall portion. It extends from the end of 212a close to the opening 211a.

  Note that the holding and fixing portion 446 and the fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and the guide plate 424 is provided on the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Is fastened and fixed.

  Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports a driving motor 462 that generates a driving force that drives the composite operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the biasing spring 445, and the guide plate 424. Is a member for guiding the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the combined operation unit 400. In other words, all of them are not direct portions visually recognized by the player, but are portions having a supplementary role of directing that generates the driving force of the operation of the composite operation unit 400 or guides the operation. .

  By arranging the fixing plate 461, the holding fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 having such a role near the front side of the back case 210, a space near the back side of the back case 210 can be made free. By using this empty space closer to the rear side as a space for retreating the part that is actually visually recognized by the player, such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the composite operation unit 400 can be stacked in the front and rear, and the opening 211a The width required for retracting the composite operation unit 400 to the outside can be reduced. Therefore, the formation width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be reduced. Thereby, the opening 211a can be expanded and the formation range of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be expanded.

  The operation unit 200 is configured such that the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 210, respectively.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is disposed on the left and right and the upper part of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is arranged inside the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210. It is arrange | positioned under the area | region which a side surface forms (refer FIG. 5).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, an outline of operation modes of the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 are appropriately referred to.

  7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 shows a state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position. A state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 are arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the combined operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. That is, in the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . As will be described later, the combined operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shielding member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and swinging operation) having different movement modes as the main body member 410 slides.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . The moving member 540 is formed as a pair of left and right, and the pair of left and right moving members 540 are united and visually recognized at the extended position shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, both the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged at the overhang position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as a single decorative member (partially overlapped in front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the width outside the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, by projecting the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (downward and upward), for example, compared to the case where all the movable members are extended in the same direction, The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened. Thereby, when the movement speeds of the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are the same, the period of movement from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18, the board surface lower unit 300 disposed in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the board surface lower unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the board lower unit 300. 10 shows a state in which only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game version 13, and in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the front unit 310 and the variable prize winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. In order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning opening 65 a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downward. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65 a is formed with the upper lid member 332 on the upper side, the lower edge with the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the left and right sides with the left and right walls of the opening upper side 313. .

  As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the above-mentioned closed state and open state by the sliding movement of the movable upper cover member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 It can be repeated (15 rounds).

  As shown in FIG. 11, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit that constitutes an out port 314 through which a ball is discharged and a specific winning port 65a, and is received at the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A front unit 310 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed thereto, a front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a path of a sphere is formed on the back side, and a receiving opening 60a It is mainly provided with a variable winning device 330 that is fitted from the back side and fastened and fixed, and includes a movable upper lid member 332 that changes the flow direction of the sphere.

  The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a sphere can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed in the center on the front side of the main body plate portion 311. The plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 protruding from the front side at the left and right upper portions of the main body plate portion 311, the upper opening portion 313 recessed from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311, and the upper opening portion thereof It mainly includes a pair of out ports 314 that are drilled in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and from which the balls are discharged out of the game area.

  The main body plate portion 311 is formed in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by the first winning port lower side 311a that forms the lower side of the first winning port 64 and is formed above the electric winning combination 640a and the pair of members of the electric winning combination 640a. A second winning port 640 provided, a light irradiation device 311b that is disposed below the second winning port 640 and illuminates the front side of the second winning port 640, and is directed to the front side in a rib shape outside the out port 314 And a ball-flowing rib 311c that is provided in a protruding manner.

  The light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320 and is directed upward (the second winning port 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning port 640. LED member that is irradiated with light.

  The ball flow rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the sphere rolling along the inner rail 61, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The inclined plate portion 312 is formed such that a ball can roll on the upper side surface, and is disposed on the upper left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as the electric accessory 640a comes closer. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left and right, the ball that rolls down by the inclined plate portion 312 can be awarded to the second prize opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball that flows down by rolling the inclined plate portion 312 can be dropped to the front side of the upper opening portion 313 with high probability.

  The opening upper part 313 is formed to be inclined upward as it goes to the left and right center. Here, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the upper opening portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning port 65a) is set such that the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning port 65a is equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere. ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, although it is difficult to win a ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball flows down along the inner rail 61 to the central portion of the game board 13, and the central portion in the left and right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win, the game can be continued.

  Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific prize opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 is the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific prize opening 65a. It is necessary to arrange the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific winning opening 65a is positioned at a low position. Can be arranged.

  In addition, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left and right direction. Can be lowered. Thereby, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

  The out port 314 is formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the upper opening portion 313, and the lower side of the out port 314 is disposed below the left and right ends of the upper opening portion 313, and the upper side of the out port 314 is disposed above. The That is, the opening upper part 313 is formed below the out port 314. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the variable prize-winning apparatus 330 mentioned later can be lowered | hung below, and the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be lowered | hung. Even in such an arrangement, in this embodiment, the sphere is caused to flow down on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 332 that has an upper surface substantially the same shape as the shape of the upper opening portion 313 and is slid in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), the game can be continued.

  The front plate member 320 is a plate-like member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the front unit 310 and formed so that a sphere can flow between the main body plate portion 311. A plate-like main body plate portion 321, a first winning port front portion 322 that is disposed at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 321 and guides a ball to the lower side 311 a of the first winning port, and an electric accessory 640 a. The electric support lower supporting portion 323, the lower lower plate 324 disposed along the lower surface of the outer port 314, and the rear side of the main body plate 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. And a ball feeding unit 325.

  The main body plate portion 321 is provided with a ball flow rib 321a that is projected in a rib shape on the back side outside the out-out lower plate 324. The ball flow rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes an accommodation recess 323a which is a horizontally elongated recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodation recess 323a.

  The out mouth lower plate 324 is provided with a thin rib extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out-out lower plate 324 includes a stepped portion 324a that protrudes upward at the left and right inner ends. The sphere that has flowed down can be decelerated by the unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the lower plate 324. Moreover, the rib formed in the out mouth lower plate 324 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side. Thereby, the speed | rate which discharges | releases the ball | bowl which has flowed down to the out port 314 can be improved.

  Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed immediately above the out-out lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 faces the out-out lower plate 324. Falling is suppressed. That is, a ball that falls after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 falls on the inner side in the left-right direction of the pair of out-out lower plates 324 (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is disposed), or on the out-out lower plate 324. Either it falls to the outer end (near the ball flow rib 321a and the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). These are both outside the rib forming range. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl falls from the high place to the out mouth lower board 324, and the durability of the out mouth lower board 324 can be improved.

  The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out port 314 and the specific winning port 65a, and a sphere that flows down from the left and right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. Thus, it is prevented from flowing down to the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). In other words, the sphere that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out-out lower plate 324 is guided exclusively to the out-out port 314.

  The ball feeding unit 325 mainly includes a back side surface 325a formed on the back side, and a left and right side surface 325b connected to the back side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

  The back side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. Thereby, the flow direction of the sphere that has reached the ball feeding portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and to prevent so-called over winning.

  Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 that forms a skeleton, and a movable upper lid member 332 that is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is slidable in the front-rear direction. A rear cover member 334 that houses a solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper cover member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 and that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly.

  The main body member 331 is provided with a deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, a lower passage 331b through which a ball won in the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and is disposed below the lower passage 331b and directed upward. A light irradiating device 331c that irradiates light and a back side accommodation portion 331d that is a recess formed on the back side toward the front side and that accommodates the solenoid 333, the lever member 334b, and the like. .

  The deformed through-hole 331a is a through-hole formed along the shape of the movable upper lid member 332 as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, and accommodates the front plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 that accommodates the rear plate 332b.

  The front opening 331a1 is a hollow formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side extends horizontally in front view, is inclined upward as the upper side goes to the center, and the left and right sides extend vertically.

  The rear opening 331a2 is an opening that is drilled in a shape in which the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 are cut off from the center of the rear side of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the front opening 331a are not formed in the front-rear direction but are formed at surface positions. Thereby, the movable upper cover member 332 can be smoothly guided.

  The lower passage 331b is formed as a pair of left and right so that a sphere can pass (see FIG. 18A), and is formed to protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor is disposed (see FIG. 15B).

  The light irradiation device 331c is a device that produces an effect by illuminating the lower passage 331b, the plate-like portion 332a1, and the like with light, and is disposed below the inner rail 61 (below the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices necessary for the light irradiation device 331c can be disposed below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) can be lowered.

  The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that emits light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed as a pair of right and left directly below the lower passage 331b and irradiates light upward.

  The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

  The movable upper cover member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 332a accommodated in the front opening 331a1, and a rear plate portion 332b accommodated in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d drilled in the vertical direction at the rear side end of the rear plate portion 332b. Prepare mainly.

  The front plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-like portion 332a1 formed in a manner of rising and inclining toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening 331a1, and the plate-like portion 332a1 is formed in the vertical direction. And a guide rib 332a3 projecting downward at the left and right end portions of the plate-like portion 332a1 and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The plate-like portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f formed to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward (see FIG. 16) and recessed toward the back side as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction. The front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, so that when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f, the ball can flow toward the center side. It is possible to prevent the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332 from being disturbed by the ball.

  Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light, as will be described later, a metal film is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished to effectively reflect light. You may do it. In the present embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 15), the guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. Thereby, the position shift of the left-right direction at the time of the sliding movement of the movement upper cover member 332 can be suppressed.

  The center rib 332c is formed at a bent portion of the front plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front side board part 332a can be improved. Further, when the movable upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in a retracted state), the movable upper lid member 332 is held on the back side of the upper opening portion 313. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from malfunctioning due to the collision between the central rib 332c and the sphere.

  The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted, and the displacement due to the swinging of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the movable upper cover member 332 (see FIG. 16).

  The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a serving as a driving source and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that is disposed below the main body 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

  The rear cover member 334 mainly includes a plate-like main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b that is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 protruding in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1, and supported by the main body portion 334a. At a substantially intermediate position between the pair of shaft portions 334b2, a lower claw portion 334b3 extending below the main body portion 334b1 and capable of accommodating the bowl-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and an upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1 And a connecting portion 334b4 that bulges into a columnar shape.

  Next, the sliding movement of the movable upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B slides the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize apparatus 330 after having made it. 16A illustrates a retracted state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed rearward, and FIG. 16B illustrates an overhanging state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed forward, In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1, the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is disposed upward, and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can be won (opened) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state, the lever member 334b is pushed forward about the shaft portion 334b2 by pressing the hook-shaped member 333b downward, and the rear surface The upper cover member 332 is slid and moved to the front side while being in contact with the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot be won (closed) at the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  In this case, the back side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swinging of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is disposed in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Accordingly, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the path | route of the light irradiated from the light irradiation apparatus 331c is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light irradiated upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like portion 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward, so that the light that has been irradiated from below and reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be noted. Thereby, the production capability of the movable upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

  Here, when an LED or the like is disposed on the movable upper lid member 332 to cause the movable upper lid member 332 to emit light, the movable upper lid member 332 may be increased in size. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not disposed on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing an increase in the size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 upward along the path E2 and traveling toward the front inclined side surface 332a1f It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like portion 332a1 by being shielded by the. In this case, the light irradiated along the path E1 from the light irradiation part 331c1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-like part 332a1 of the front side plate part 332a and is transmitted as it is. Therefore, the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 are used. Is seen darkly by the player.

  That is, whether the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes depending on whether the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state or the extended state, and the front plate It changes whether the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is visually recognized brightly. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball at the specific winning opening 65a by confirming the brightness state of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320.

  Accordingly, as in the present embodiment, since the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, even when it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the movable upper lid member 332 in front view (FIGS. 17A and 17B). )), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball in the specific winning opening 65a by the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0.

  Here, the movable upper lid member 332 is operated to form a closed state that prevents the passage of the ball to the specific winning port 65a and an open state that allows the passage of the ball to the specific winning port 65a ( The brightness state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the forward / backward slide movement). In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper cover member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. In other words, the movable upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the sphere can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of performing the effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

  In addition, when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light may be reflected by the sphere so that the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c is reflected. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be illuminated brightly in a front view.

  With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the sphere in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms the extended state and the case where the retracted state is formed will be described. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial front views of the game board 13. 17A shows a case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state (see FIG. 16B), and in FIG. 17B, the movable upper lid member 332 is in a retracted state (FIG. 16). 17A is shown, and in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, whether or not the movable upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b), the portion where the hatching is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate to the extent that the passage of the sphere with the front plate member 320 is blocked. This is a portion close to the member 320.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the sphere falling on the path C <b> 2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 may fall down due to the weight of the sphere, and as a result, when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the stepped portion 324a, the sphere is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and it will interfere with the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable upper cover member 332 is several times as long as the length protruding to the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times longer, see FIG. 16B). It is accommodated in the modified through-hole 331a and is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the modified through-hole 331a in the vertical direction across the front and rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through-hole 331a, it is possible to suppress the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. Thus, the left and right end portions of the movable upper cover member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the bottom of the third symbol display device 81 The edge can be lowered downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the sphere can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the sphere rolling along the inner rail 61 from the left and right along the path C1 collides with the stepped portion 324a and is discharged to the out port 314. Therefore, the sphere falls along the path C2 from above toward the specific winning port 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the out ports 314 through which the balls falling from the step portion 324a can be lowered.

  In this case, it is difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in this embodiment, the ball is blocked from the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the right and left end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is moved along the inner rail 61 toward the center of the game area by gravity. Then, the player enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 16), it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

  As a result, the movable upper cover member 332 that forms the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is spaced apart from the inner rail 61 above the diameter of the sphere at least near the center of the game area (the vicinity where the inner rail 61 is disposed at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the movable upper lid member 332 can be lowered. Therefore, compared with the case where it is necessary to separate upward from the inner rail 61 at a position other than the center of the inner rail 61 beyond the diameter of the sphere, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered downward. Thereby, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the function of the ball flow ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feeding portion 325 and the fact that light is collected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f will be described. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17B, and FIG. 18B is a board lower unit 300 taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the panel surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation units 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18B.

  In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the sphere is described as paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper cover member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is on the near side (upper side of FIG. 17B) than the cross section of FIG. 18A, and is not actually visible, but for the convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (FIG. 18 paper surface). In a state in which the positions of (viewed in the vertical direction) coincide with each other, it is shown by an imaginary line in FIG. Further, in FIG. 18B and FIG. 18C, three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

  A path of a ball that rolls along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) from the left-right direction and is discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the sphere rolling from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 18A abuts on at least one of the ball flow rib 311c or the ball flow rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while abutting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts the ball flow rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while abutting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball flow rib. 321a abuts.

  Here, when the sphere comes into contact with the ball flow rib 311c, the velocity direction of the sphere is directed in the direction along the path C1a, and then comes into contact with the ball flow rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the sphere rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or the sphere rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling sphere is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

  By causing a ball that rolls along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) to abut against the rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the speed of the sphere can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18 (a)) before the sphere is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 to when the ball is discharged from the game area, and to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. In addition, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. Thereby, when the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out port 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning port 65a can be lowered below the game area.

  The case where a sphere falls between the step parts 324a arranged in a pair of left and right will be described. In this case, the sphere that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the sphere comes into contact with the left and right side surfaces 325b of the sphere feed portion 325 so that the speed direction of the sphere is along the path C2a. Change. Thereby, since it can suppress that a ball | bowl stays in the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (refer FIG. 10), an over winning can be suppressed.

  When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere blocks the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) based on whether the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 are viewed brightly or darkly. it can.

  Accordingly, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is disposed in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning port 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the sphere flows down in the light traveling direction (see FIG. 18C) or the sphere flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks light can be shortened. In other words, the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is viewed brightly can be lengthened, and the rendering ability of the front side inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Thereafter, the light is not blocked by the sphere around the passage of the sphere through the front end portion (right side of FIG. 18B) of the lower passage 331b (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

  In this case, even if the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each sphere, so that the brightness change of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is changed. By confirming, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are in a parallel relationship, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until that time, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

  In this case, when the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the left sphere in FIG. 18C) as long as the sphere is arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first sphere falls downward from the rear end portion (left side of FIG. 18 (c)) of the lower passage 331b, the light path to the second sphere (right sphere of FIG. 18 (c)). E3 is blocked. In addition, when the second sphere falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b and the next sphere (third sphere) enters the lower passage 331b, the light path to the sphere. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to shield the light path E3, and the sphere is always visually recognized as dark while flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of changes in whether the light is viewed brightly or darkly does not necessarily match the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a is not the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. In contrast, the present embodiment has the above-described advantages.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the center in the left-right direction, so that the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiation portions 331c1 is the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is condensed along the path E1 to the center of the front plate member 320, and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, in this embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is disposed on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visible through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting elements that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 are limited.

  On the other hand, the front inclined side surface 332a1f condenses the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 to the center of the front plate member 320, so that each of the light irradiated from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is overlapped, The intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be improved. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element with low light intensity).

  Moreover, since the light irradiated from a pair of light irradiation part 331c1 is overlapped and visually recognized by front view (refer FIG.17 (b)), a pair of light irradiation is made by making light colors mutually differ. A total of three colors of light emitted from the part 331c1 and the combined color can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the light irradiated from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by a sphere that rolls along the path C2a independently (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the sphere shields the light, The color of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be switched variously.

  For example, in FIG. 18, a case is considered where “blue” light is emitted from the right light irradiation unit 331c1 and “red” light is emitted from the left light irradiation unit 331c1. In this case, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the order of “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red” from the right side in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B). Is visible.

  In this case, if the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 and shields the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the “blue” color light is shielded. Only “red” light is visible.

  On the other hand, when the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 and shields the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the “red” color light is shielded. Only “blue” light is visible.

  Thus, the mode of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 shields. The change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area along a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, so that the change in the light mode can be generated at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change in the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is caused by electronic control, it is possible to perform a more rich effect and improve the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a square shape as viewed from above, but may be formed in a parabolic shape in top view from the viewpoint of collecting light.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. 19 and 20 illustrate a state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixed plate 461 are not illustrated. In the combined operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210.

  FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 is a horizontally long rectangular main body member 410 that is slidable in the vertical direction, and one end can be guided to the left and right ends of the main body member 410. A shield member 420 that is a pair of connected members and whose other ends are pivotally supported with each other, a swinging member 430 that is swingably disposed on the center front side of the main body member 410, and the main body member 410 A pair of leg members 440 that are fastened to both ends and extended in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 in which a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440 is formed, and a driving force necessary for the movement of the leg member 440 are provided. A driving device 460 to be generated, a rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and a connection between the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410 so that wiring is accommodated therein. Composed mainly comprises a guide arm 480, a.

  23 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430. FIG. 24 is a rear exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 includes a plate-like base member 411 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and is drilled in the front-rear direction at the left and right end portions of the base member 411 so as to extend in the vertical direction. A long hole-like leg insertion hole 412 that extends and a direction that is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction with respect to the leg insertion hole 412 of the base member 411 and that is perforated in the front-rear direction and that is inclined upward toward the left-right central axis of the base member 411 A long hole-shaped guide hole 413 extending to the front and a columnar member extending from the upper end of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. A pair of arm shaft support portions 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center in the left-right direction of the base member 411 and having a tip formed in a bowl shape, and a swinging member 430 provided as a pair at the lower end portion of the base member 411. The shaft support hole 431a A supporting shaft portion 416, a photosensor 417 that is disposed in front of the base member 411 and detects the sensor passage portion 435d of the swinging member 430, a decorative plate portion 418 formed in a substantially semicircular shape in front view, Is mainly provided.

  The base member 411 has a shape in which a central portion in the left-right direction is suspended downward from both left and right end portions. Thereby, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be disposed in the space (see FIG. 29).

  The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in a long hole shape, and the leg member 440 is prevented from rotating with respect to the base member 411 by inserting the connection fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440. The Thereby, the attitude | position of the leg member 440 and the main-body member 410 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole 413 is a long hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and slid, and has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. On the upper side of the guide hole 413, a front lid 413a that covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and has a side surface facing the guide hole 413 along the upper side of the guide hole 413 is disposed. On the side, a support plate 413b that is a plate-like portion protruding from the front side of the base member 411 and is inclined upward along the guide hole 413 is disposed.

  The support plate 413b is in contact with the back surface of the swing base member 421 at the front end. Thus, the swinging base member 421 is prevented from swinging back and forth by the support plate 413b, so that the posture during movement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  The arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed on the left side as viewed from the front of the center portion of the base member 411. More specifically, the arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed at an intermediate portion between the portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 begins to hang down and the central portion in the left-right direction. Is done. Note that the arm shaft support portion 414 supports the end portion (lower end portion) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480, and a collar member is provided at the tip of the arm shaft support portion 414. Fastened and fixed.

  The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked by a slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the holding portion 415 formed in a bowl shape are brought into contact with each other, The downward movement of the main body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the tip portion formed in a bowl shape. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position with the slide lever 473 protruding.

  The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that is viewed in front view together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, and in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), and is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

  The shielding member 420 includes a swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that ends of a pair of plate-like members are pivotally supported, and a decorative member whose upper end is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. 422, a pair of connecting members 423 whose one end is pivotally supported coaxially with the pivot position of the swing base member 421, and a guide whose other end is pivotally supported. A guide plate 424 that mainly has a hole 424b and is fastened and fixed to the upper end on the front side of the rear case 210 is mainly provided.

  The swing base member 421 is formed of a pair of plate-like members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape, and is a swing shaft that is supported coaxially with a shaft support hole 423d formed in one end of the connecting member 423. It mainly includes a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided through the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, and a contact plate 421d that protrudes on the back surface side and contacts the upper surface of the main body member 410. .

  The swing shaft hole 421b is a portion that is supported by being suspended by the connecting member 423 through a shaft support rod 423c that is inserted into one end of the connecting member 423, and that serves as the swing shaft of the pair of plate-like members 421a. It is.

  Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved downward from the intermediate position (see FIG. 30). Moves toward the center in the left-right direction.

  The contact plate 421d is a curved surface protruding from the plate-like member 421a on the back side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. Thereby, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position.

  The decorative member 422 has a pair of width-thickness portions 422a disposed on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in a front view, with a lower end portion. And a hanging portion 422b that is curved backward from the swing base member 421.

  The hanging part 422b is disposed closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

  The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of bar members 423a bent in a frontal shape at the bent portion 423b, and includes a shaft support bar 423c. One end of the bar member 423a has a shaft support bar 423c. A shaft support hole 423d through which the guide member 422 is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e that is inserted and guided through the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the bar member 423a.

  The bent portion 423b is bent above a straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is arranged farther from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423 can be secured, and the design freedom of the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted through the guide hole 424b and a disk-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

  The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210, and guide holes 424b that are a pair of elongated holes that are formed in the left and right ends of the base plate 424a in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction. Is mainly provided. A pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

  The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the back case 210. Therefore, the width necessary for the guide plate 424 to guide the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position further away from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed in a larger size accordingly.

  The swinging member 430 is a member that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 416, and is a base member 431 that swings and a base that protrudes from the front side of the central portion of the base member 411. A member 432, a drive motor 433 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 432 and generates a drive force that drives the main body member 431, a drive gear 434 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 433, and the drive gear 434 are engaged with each other. A transmission gear 435 that is pivotally supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a connection member 436 that connects the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the connection shaft 431b of the body member 431. Prepare for.

  The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative part is formed on the front side, and is provided with a shaft support hole 431a that is drilled in the left-right direction below the both ends of the rear side left and right direction and through which the shaft support part 416 is inserted. And a connecting shaft 431b that is disposed at the center on the side and on which one end of the connecting member 436 is pivotally supported.

  The connecting shaft 431b is disposed on the back side of the main body member 431 at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end portion on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a. Thereby, the movement width of the upper end portion of the main body member 431 can be made larger than the movement width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

  The transmission gear 435 is supported by the base member 432 and extends on the opposite side of the gear formed on the main body 435a. The main body 435a is formed with a gear engaged with the drive gear 434 over a substantially half circumference. Formed along the side surface of the overhanging portion 435b, the columnar connecting shaft 435c projecting rightward from the overhanging front end portion of the overhanging portion 435b, and the front left side of the overhanging portion 435b. And a sensor passage portion 435d (see FIG. 34) that is formed in a sector shape when viewed in the left-right direction and whose peripheral portion passes through the photosensor 417.

  The connecting member 436 is a rod-like member having holes parallel to each other at both ends, and is provided with a one-side connecting hole 436a that is provided at one end and is pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. , And the other side connection hole 436b that is provided at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435.

  Returning to FIG. 21 and FIG. The arm member 440 has a long plate-like main body portion 441 with a pair extending in the vertical direction, and a long hole shape in which the cross section protruding from the upper end of the main body portion 441 to the front side is long in the vertical direction. A connecting and fixing portion 442, a pair of insertion shaft portions 443 projecting from the upper and lower end portions of the main body portion 441 to the back side and inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and the front side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 441. And the other end of the biasing spring 445 whose one end is locked to the locking portion 444 and the rear case 210. And a holding and fixing portion 446 that is fastened and fixed to the front side.

  The main body 441 has a rack gear 441 a formed on the side surface facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441 a meshes with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460, thereby driving generated by the drive device 460. Force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

  The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long slot shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the guide member 450 extending vertically, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can do. Furthermore, since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed as a pair of upper and lower portions, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

  The biasing spring 445 generates a biasing force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the urging spring 445 functions as a fixed side end that is locked to the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end functions as a moving side end that is locked to the locking portion 444.

  The guide member 450 is a main body member 451 that is a vertically long plate member arranged in a pair of left and right, and a long hole shape that is formed in the main body member 451 in a pair of upper and lower directions in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Guide holes 452, a pair of fixing portions 453 that fix the driving device 460 at the center in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and the leg members 440 are retracted from the front side of the upper end portion of the main body member 451 ( And a cover member 454 disposed on the front side of the leg member 440 in the state of being disposed in FIG.

  The driving device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step backward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212b ( A fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461, a driving motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a driving gear 463 pivotally supported by the driving motor 462 are mainly provided.

  Since the fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side away from the main body member 410 is raised to the front side, a gap surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461 can be formed on the side away from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the urging springs 445 are arranged on the left and right of the leg member 440, the arrangement width of the leg members 440 including the urging spring 4454 in the left-right direction is increased, thereby reducing the left-right width of the opening 211a. It was. In this embodiment, the urging spring 445 can be disposed in a gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and accordingly, the left and right sides of the leg member 440 are arranged accordingly. Space in the direction can be suppressed.

  The rear upper plate 470 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and includes a plate-like main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471. A cylindrical shaft support portion 472 that protrudes from the upper left end portion of the front view to the front side, a slide lever 473 that is long in the left-right direction disposed at the center of the main body portion 471, and the slide lever 473 is in the left-right direction. And a front cover 475 that is fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473.

  The shaft support portion 472 is a portion on which the one side cylindrical portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip. Wiring introduced into the main body member 410 is disposed through the vicinity of the shaft support portion 472.

  The slide lever 473 is a member that is brought into contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 and prevents the main body member 410 from moving downward when the main body member 410 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 29). is there. An inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. Since the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410 are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that is generated on the contact surface.

  The slide lever 473 has a protruding margin that varies depending on whether electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 protrudes to the left as viewed from the front when electricity is conducted, the slide lever 473 comes into contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the body member 410 is in a state where electricity is conducted. Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not in contact with each other, and the main body member 410 is allowed to move downward.

  Here, it is conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven and the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the holding portion 415 as the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473 after the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, when detecting the arrangement of the main body member 410 and changing the operation of the driving device 460, it is necessary to control the driving device 460 in consideration of the time for which the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473, and the control is difficult. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is disposed opposite to the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward with the slide lever 473 protruding (FIG. 31). (See FIG.) And the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 protrudes again and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever The upper surface of 473 is brought into contact (see FIG. 29). Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in an extended state, it is possible to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, it becomes easy to control the driving device 460.

  The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a that is a recessed groove for guiding the slide lever 473 on the back surface is formed along the left-right direction. The slide groove 475a of the front cover 475 causes the slide lever 473 to slide. It is possible to suppress the displacement in the vertical direction during movement.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion that is formed of a resin material and guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210 to the main body member 410. A first guide arm 481 in which the formed one-side cylindrical portion 481b is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 472, and a second guide arm 482 in which the other end portion of the first guide arm 481 is pivotally supported by one end portion. And a third guide arm 483 that pivotally supports the other end portion of the second guide arm 482 at one end portion and is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support portion 414.

  Here, the wiring W is an electric wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a strip shape (formed wide in the vertical direction in FIG. 27). The second guide arm 482 has a length in the longitudinal direction shorter than the diameter of the collar member C than the first guide arm 481, and the third guide arm 483 has a length in the longitudinal direction rather than the second guide arm 482. Is shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is configured to accommodate the wiring W therein, and is a member that prevents the wiring W from being broken and disconnected. Thereby, it is not necessary to arrange | position the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and the space which arrange | positions the leg member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be enlarged in the left-right direction.

  Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the third guide arm 483 is configured to include those described in the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 as the technical idea, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  25 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is an XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along the line -XXVc, and FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 includes a plate-like arm portion 481a formed in a long plate shape, and the left end of the plate-like arm portion 481a when viewed from the front. A cylindrical portion 481b having a shaft arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface (the side surface on the lower side in FIG. 25A) of the plate-like arm portion 481a and extending in the front-rear direction, and the plate-like arm portion The other side tubular portion extending in the front-rear direction and having an axis disposed on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-like arm portion 481a at the end opposite to the one-side tubular portion 481b in the end portion of 481a. 481c, an attachment portion 481d formed in a plate shape at a predetermined interval above the plate-like arm portion 481a, a bottom portion 481e that connects the back side of the plate-like arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d, and an attachment portion 481d Front locking portion 481 extending from the front side surface toward the plate-like arm portion 481a. And, mainly includes the.

  The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross section formed by the plate-like arm portion 481a, the appendage portion 481d, and the bottom portion 481e (see FIG. 27). Thereby, it can suppress that the wiring W is rubbed with another member, or is pinched | interposed into another member.

  In the plate-like arm portion 481a, a notch portion 481a1 is formed at a portion opposed to the front locking portion 481f, and the plate-like arm portion 481a is thinned at a portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed. .

  The cutout portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-like arm portion 481a in a slightly larger shape than the front locking portion 481f when viewed from the front, and is formed across the width direction of the plate-like arm portion 481a. Note that in the portion where the notch 481a1 is formed, the formation of the bottom 481e is omitted (the bottom 481e is formed through).

  By configuring the cutout portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by mold molding (by one-way mold cutting). In addition, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481 by inserting the wiring W from the notch 481a1.

  Of the plate-like arm portion 481a, the portion other than the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed has a shorter interval with the attachment portion 481d than the overhanging width of the front locking portion 481f. Therefore, in a state where the wiring W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wiring W is dropped off to the front side (FIG. 27A front side). Can be prevented.

  The plate-like arm portion 481a includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other cylindrical portion 481c that is pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and is a rib that protrudes from the second guide arm 482 in the middle portion of the plate-like arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with portions N.

  The other cylindrical portion 481c includes an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased, and an end surface on the back side is more on the front side than the bottom portion 481e in order to form an overlap margin with the second guide arm. It is formed (see FIG. 25B).

  The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed over the inner circumference side of the other cylindrical portion 481c over a half circumference (the upper half circumference in FIG. 25A), and the other side from the other bottom portion 481e2 side of the other side cylindrical portion 481c. It is a depression formed up to approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side cylindrical portion 481c (see FIG. 25C).

  The attachment portion 481d includes an arcuate attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc concentric with the other side tubular portion 481c around the other side tubular portion 481c, and extends to the front side from the plate-like arm portion 481a. . Thereby, even if it is a case where the plane latching | locking part 481f is formed, the clearance gap which penetrates wiring from the front side is securable.

  The attachment portion 481d includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the plate-like arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N projecting from the plate-like arm portion 481a in the intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

  The arcuate appendage 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27 (b)). The

  In addition, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed on the inner upper end of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached along a route that is not blocked by the rear case 210. It is necessary to remove. In the present embodiment, the appendage portion 481d that is close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed so as to protrude forward from the plate-like arm portion 481a that is separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, it is only necessary to pull the wiring W to the front side and pull it out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-like arm portion 481a. Never become. When wiring is inserted, it may be inserted in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of replacement of the wiring W can be improved.

  The bottom portion 481e is disposed above the one-side cylindrical portion 481b and is disposed above the one-side bottom portion 481e1 formed in a fan shape around the axis of the one-side tubular portion and the other-side tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom part 481e2 formed mainly in the fan shape centering on the axis | shaft spaced apart from the axis | shaft of the side cylindrical part 481c upwards is mainly provided. Note that the end of the arcuate appendage 481d1 is formed on the left side of the front view of the end of the other side bottom 481e2.

  The plane locking portion 481f is a claw-like member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

  26 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26 (c) is an XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 taken along the line -XXVIc, and FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 taken along the line XXVId-XXVId of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the second guide arm 482 includes a plurality of configurations having the same technical idea as the first guide arm 481, and therefore the description of the configuration is omitted. To do. That is, the plate-like arm portion 481a is the plate-like arm portion 482a, the other-side tubular portion 481c is the other-side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f.

  The plate-like arm portion 482a includes a cutout portion 482a2 at a portion disposed opposite to the front locking portion 482f. Since the technical idea of the notch 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notch 481a1, description thereof will be omitted.

  The plate-like arm portion 482a and the appendage portion 482d include a rib portion N on the side surfaces facing each other. In the vicinity of the one-side shaft support portion 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, a rib portion N is formed in the attachment portion 482d, and in the intermediate portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-like arm portion 482a. And the appendage 482d.

  The second guide arm 482 protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the upper right part of the bottom part 482e to the front side and has a one-side shaft support part 482b in which a fastening part is formed at the tip, and the one-side shaft support part 482b as a shaft. One side bottom portion 482e1 formed in a substantially arc shape and extending on the same plane from the bottom portion 482e, and the right end portion of the plate-like arm portion 482a protruding from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one side bottom portion 482e1 to the front side And an arcuate plate portion 482a1 connected to the main body.

  The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27 (b)). The

  The one side shaft support portion 482b is a portion in which a reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other cylindrical portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 is the other side cylinder. It is formed so that it can contact | abut to the back side surface of the shape part 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottom portions 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane so that the bottom portions 481e and 482e can come into contact with each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, excessive rotation of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being bent excessively (see FIG. 27).

  The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b over a half circumference (the lower half circumference in FIG. 26A), and the one-side shaft from the one-side bottom portion 482e1 side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b This is a recess formed up to approximately half the length of the support portion 482b (see FIG. 26C).

  Next, swinging of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 27A and 27B are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. FIG. 27A shows a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 29), and FIG. 27B shows the state shown in FIG. A state in which the second guide arm 482 is swung counterclockwise from the state a) to the end of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing relative to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27B, the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are in contact with each other, thereby preventing the second guide arm 482 from further swinging. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the wiring W has concave portions (FIGS. 25 (d) and 26 (d) formed by plate-like arm portions 481a and 482a, appendages 481d and 482d, and bottom portions 481e and 482e. ))). Therefore, the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482 can prevent the wiring W from being bent to the extent that the body member 410 is disconnected during the movement of the main body member 410.

  In addition, at the pivotal support position (the right end in FIG. 27A) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is disposed around the other cylindrical portion 481c. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wiring W from being bent at a radius of curvature equal to or less than the diameter of the other cylindrical portion 481c at the pivotal support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being bent, and disconnection of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The state shown in FIG. 27A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 29, that is, the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. A higher speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position is likely to improve the effect. When the main body member 410 is started from a state where it is stopped at the retracted position, it is necessary for the driving device 460 to generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. For this reason, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotational resistance at the shaft support position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 constituting the wiring guide arm 480 is small.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the diameter-enlarged portion 481c1 and the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b are arranged. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 surrounds. The enlarged-diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced-diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in a direction away from the mating member that forms the axial support relationship, and have an effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. In a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one-side cylindrical portion 481b (over the entire circumference). Therefore, resistance when the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27B, the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one-side cylindrical portion 481b is substantially a half circle (FIG. 27B, upper half circumference). ). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are mostly overlapped. In this case, the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state of FIG.

  From the state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the extended diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap each other as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481. And the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be decreased as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481.

  Accordingly, the speed at which the other side bottom part 481e2 and the one side bottom part 482e1 come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are brought into contact with the other side bottom part 481e2 and the one side bottom part 482e1. The load received by contact can be suppressed. Thereby, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are vigorously opposed to each other (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). It is possible to prevent bending from the state (b) to the side further rotated counterclockwise.

  In this embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by pivotally supporting three members, the movement speed of the wiring guide arm 480 can be made variable even when the movement speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

  For example, in the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). The changeable part is changeable. Therefore, the moving speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by the change in the posture of the third guide arm 483 even while the main body member 410 is moving. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, a gap is formed between the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 and the arcuate plate portion 482a1 when the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other. Even if the wiring W is bent to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B) by this gap, the wiring W is sandwiched between the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 and the arcuate plate portion 482a1. Can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the wiring guide arm 480 is in the opened state, the wiring W moves greatly to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c, and in particular, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide. The wiring W is likely to be displaced in the vicinity of the end portion (axial support position) of the arm 482. If the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W and the inner surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are rubbed, and the durability of the wiring W is reached. May be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rib portion N formed in a rib shape on the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is caught by the wire W, so that the wire W and the first guide arm 481 and Resistance with the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and displacement of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  In the vicinity of the pivot support position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is effective by forming the rib portion N on the side surface opposite to the direction in which the wiring W is separated from the other cylindrical portion 481c. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W that protrudes from the connecting position of the arcuate appendage 481d1 and the appendage 481d toward the appendage 481d is pressed against the plate-like arm 481a along the shape of the arcuate appendage 481d1. . Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be increased.

  It should be noted that the side surface of the portion near the pivotal support position of the plate-like arm portion 481a against which the wiring W is pressed is curved and recessed to the opposite side of the attachment portion 481d, so that the wiring W is fitted into the depression, and the wiring The positional shift between W and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be suppressed. In this case, since the surface of the curved depression and the wiring W are in contact with each other by surface contact, the local wear of the wiring W is suppressed compared to the case where the wiring W receives resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. Can do.

  Further, the interval between the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portion 481d may be widened in the vicinity of the pivot support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined in such a manner that the attachment portion 481d becomes farther from the plate-like arm portion 481a as it approaches the other side tubular portion 481c from the front locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. In this case, the wiring W is bent by a portion where the gap between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a is widened (portion in the vicinity of the other cylindrical portion 481c). It is possible to absorb the displacement of the wiring W at the intermediate portion of the first guide arm 481 (the portion sandwiched between the front locking portions 481f) (the wiring W cancels the sag near the support portion). Therefore, it is possible to suppress displacement in the longitudinal direction of the first guide arm 481). Accordingly, the wiring W can be prevented from rubbing and wearing against the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481, and the durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  In an intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side surfaces arranged to face each other. Therefore, compared to the case where the rib portion N is formed on only one of the opposing inner side surfaces, the wiring W can be easily hooked on more rib portions N. Thereby, resistance between the wiring W and the 1st guide arm 481 and the 2nd guide arm 482 can be raised, and position shift with the wiring W and the 1st guide arm 481 and the 2nd guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

  In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped collar member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. For example, the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the one-side shaft support portion 482b or the tip of the shaft support portion 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted through the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the front surface of each cylindrical portion 481b, 481c. It is a member which prevents the movement to the side.

  In the present embodiment, the collar member C extends to a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps the adjacent appendages 481d and 482d in the front view or does not overlap in the front view, and the collar member C and the appendages 481d, The wiring W extends from the position 482d to a position where the wiring W does not fall out. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27B, there is a gap between the collar member C and the appendage portion 481d, but the wiring W is deformed so as to be separated from the one-side tubular portion 481b (swell outward). Therefore, the possibility of the wiring W dropping out from the gap is small. That is, the collar member C is extended until it overlaps the wiring W when viewed from the front (FIG. 27), thereby having a diameter sufficient to prevent the wiring W from dropping off. As a result, the wiring W is prevented from falling off the wiring guide arm 480.

  Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed with the same length, the collar member C is brought into contact with the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 when folded. Can no longer be folded. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction are different. That is, in a state where the extending directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are arranged on the front side of the one-side tubular portion 481b. The color member C is different from the collar member C provided on the front side of the other cylindrical portion 482c so as not to interfere with each other.

  As a result, the arrangement space can be suppressed by folding the wiring guide arm 480 while suppressing the wiring W from falling off the wiring guide arm 480 by disposing the collar member C. It is desirable that the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction (the length to the axis of the collar member C) be different from the diameter of the collar member C.

  Next, the operation of the composite operation unit 400 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, a change in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described.

  28 is a front view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400.

  28 and 29 show a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. In FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state in FIGS. FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 show a state in which the body member 410 is disposed at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. A state in which the member 410 is disposed at the overhang position is illustrated.

  In FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30 and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is illustrated by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is an imaginary line. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is shown in phantom lines.

  Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is enlarged, and the state in which the connecting member 423 is moved by a predetermined amount from the center side ends of the pair of guide holes 424 b in the enlarged view is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done. In FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is enlarged, and a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421 c is moved from the lower end of the guide hole 413 by a predetermined amount in the enlarged view is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The main body member 410 is moved in the vertical direction along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 engaged with the drive gear 463 is moved as the drive gear 463 is rotated.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. Thus, the central portion of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the left and right end portions of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. The wiring guide arms 480 are folded in a posture in which the extending directions of the respective guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper side surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower side surface of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other, whereby the downward movement of the main body member 410 is prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of the mechanism portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swinging member 430 is a gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 (formed at the center in the left-right direction and downward). It is arranged in a gap that becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). Thereby, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position, the swinging member 430 can be disposed in the vertical direction on the shielding member 420 and the vertical width of the shielding member 420 and the swinging member 430 can be increased. Can be suppressed. In this case, since the area of the front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430 can be reduced, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be further enlarged.

  Here, for example, a mechanism portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swinging member 430 may be disposed on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (to bring the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 close to each other in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decorative member 422 is moved to its mechanical portion. It can be considered to be arranged on the front side. On the other hand, in this case, it is necessary to move the swinging member 430 that accommodates the decorative member 422 to the front side (direction away from the main body member 410), so that the space on the front side of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, and the neck It becomes difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swinging member 430 (a mechanism portion such as the transmission gear 435) can be accommodated in a space that is generated when the pair of decorative members 422 are separated from each other. it can. Accordingly, for example, it is not necessary to move the decoration member 422 to the front side of the mechanism portion of the swing member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P of the main body member 410 and the decoration member 422. 430 may be disposed proximate to the body member 410. Thereby, the swinging member 430 can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

  In FIG. 28, since the swinging member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 tilts (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in the front view is suppressed as compared with the standing posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35). The Therefore, even when viewed as a single swing member 430, the area of the front view formed by the swing member 430 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421 d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. Thus, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 has the same posture as that of FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner side end portion of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has the third guide arm 483 mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are inclined with respect to the left-right direction.

  Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the state in which the third guide arm 483 is stably placed on the upper side surface of the main body member 410 is changed to the main body member. It can be maintained longer during 410 movement. Thereby, the wiring W arrange | positioned inside the wiring guide arm 480 can be stabilized more, and the disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at a high speed and disposed at an intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420 is moved. There is a possibility that the shaft support position (the shaft support rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 jumps upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 is not stable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the inner side in the left-right direction, and the guide for guiding the slide shaft portion 423e is guided. A hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction.

  In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the direction component perpendicular to the direction in which the insertion shaft portion 421c rebounds the pivot position between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423. It is guided to be movable in the direction having

  Therefore, a resistance F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c that is moved upward in accordance with the upward movement of the swing base member 421, and the upper portion of the insertion shaft portion 421c. The movement to is suppressed. In this case, the swinging base member 421 is restrained from bouncing upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 from bouncing back at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 jumps upward and the connecting member 423 jumps upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is brought into contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b, thereby suppressing the movement of the connecting member. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the bent portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423, and even if the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, the bent portion 423b does not move from the swing base member 421. It moves in the direction away from the upper surface (the bent portion 213b moves to the center in the left-right direction by the distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b, a sufficient interval can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421. The collision with the swing base member 421 can be prevented. Thereby, the design freedom degree of the rocking | swiveling base member 421 can be improved.

  In the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to move to the left in the front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted through the guide hole 424b on the right side in the front view is located at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of guide holes 424b. The movement is stopped at the end, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner side end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has a posture in which the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 are in contact with each other in the swinging direction. Take.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c move upward and downward in the left-right direction along the guide hole 413 as the movement proceeds. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swing base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are directed in opposite directions, and cancel each other. Therefore, the swing shaft hole 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axis of the pair of swing base members 421 is restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction, so that the shielding member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decoration members 422 of the shielding member 420 are brought into contact with each other. Thereby, for example, even if one swinging base member 421 moves faster than the other swinging base member 421 and the pair of swinging base members 421 are displaced from each other (vertical shift), The displacement can be suppressed by contact with the swing base member 421. Thereby, the attitude | position in the projecting position of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  A change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position to the state where the body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, particularly in the central portion in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is reduced. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 are visible separately.

  Thereby, the area in the front view of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 is larger when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position than when the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. In particular, the width in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction is enlarged. In this case, the area change in the front view of the area formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be increased at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that is likely to attract the player's attention. The effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described change in the area of the overlapping portion P occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to protrude to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Thereby, it is possible to produce an effect as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the operation of the swing member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXV-XXXV in FIG. 34, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted is illustrated by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is accommodated between the main body member 431 and the main body member 410 of the swinging member 430. The resulting state is illustrated. In FIG. 35, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is raised is illustrated by a solid line, and the state in which the swinging member 430 is tilted is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and is disposed in an overhanging state. The moving member 540 of the rocking motion unit 500 is shown in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, so that the connecting shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connection is made. When the connecting member 436 supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 supported by the connecting member 436 swings around the shaft supporting portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in a direction approaching and separating from the decorative member 422b. Note that the swinging member 430 can switch between the tilted state shown in FIG. 34 and the standing state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and the posture can be changed as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

  Since the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swinging member 430, when the swinging member 430 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side disposed to face the shielding member 420 A large distance D between the main body member 410 and the main body member 410 can be secured. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swinging member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the swinging member 430 is compared with the case where the swinging member 430 slides back and forth. It is possible to suppress a space necessary for disposing the slab.

  In other words, when the space for storing the shielding member 420 is secured by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the swinging member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 is also moved by the distance D in the same manner as the upper end portion. Therefore, the arrangement space for the swinging member 430 increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 430 is swung, so that the shielding member 420 can be smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430, and the arrangement region of the swinging member 430 can be increased. It is possible to achieve both suppression.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower portion on the front side of the main body member 431 is small while the swinging member 430 is tilted. Therefore, even if the main body member 431 is tilted in a state where another member approaches or abuts below the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress the load between the members.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 forms a downwardly convex curved surface, and the main body member 431 is close to this curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap in a front view). This makes it possible to change the posture of the main body member 431 with a large width at the upper portion of the main body member 431 while ensuring the effect of allowing the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 to approach each other at the lower portion of the main body member 431 so as to be integrally viewed. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined toward the back surface (the main body member 410 side) as it goes downward (closer to the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23)). And curved in a direction away from the swinging member 430. In this case, the distance between the decorative member 422 and the swinging member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410 can be secured. Collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

  Further, the lower end portion of the decorative member 422 can be accommodated deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430 while the upper end portion of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. . Since no other members are arranged on the front side of the swinging member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swinging member 430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the state where the swinging member 430 is raised, the decoration member 422 is separated upward from between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is separated. The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are disposed close to each other. Thereby, the dead space when the decorative member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430 can be filled. In addition, by allowing the body member 431 of the swinging member 430 to be disposed close to the body member 410, it is possible to increase the movement width of the swinging member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined. This can ensure the effect of the swinging motion of the swinging member 430.

  Here, in FIG. 34, the swinging member 430 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81, and the swinging member 430 is tilted. In this case, the direction A1 of the production surface on the front side of the swinging member 430 is inclined obliquely downward toward the front. In contrast, in FIG. 35, the swinging member 430 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the state in which the swinging member 430 is raised is illustrated by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the production surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the swinging degree of the swinging member 430, the direction A1 and A2 on the front side of the swinging member 430 is directed toward the player's eyes (the front side in the center of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted. Therefore, the attention of the swinging member 430 can be improved, and the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in order to improve the attention of the swinging member 430, a new rotation shaft is not provided, but the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23) is used. That is, the shaft support portion 416 has a purpose of securing a distance between the decorative member 422 and the swinging member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the orientations A1 and A2 on the front side of the member 430 to the direction toward the player's eyes (the front side in the center of the third symbol display device 81).

  The degree of swinging of the swinging member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passage portion 435d passes through the photosensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passage portion 435d does not pass through the photosensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passage portion 435 passes through the photosensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gap between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 is ensured in a state where the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photosensor 417.

  Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 upward in a state where the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photosensor 417, the shielding member 420 and the main body member 410 can be moved without causing the swinging member 430 and the shielding member 420 to interfere with each other. It can be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the swinging member 430.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, it will be described that the malfunction of the combined operation unit 400 is suppressed by the shape of the hanging portion 422b. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXVII-XXXVII in FIG. 36 and 37 show a state where the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b. .

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is in an intermediate position between a standing state (see FIG. 35) and a tilted state (see FIG. 34). Control may be performed. This control is performed, for example, when the combined operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG.

  Here, after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the standing state shown in FIG. 35, the drive motor 462 that drives the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21). , The state where the back side of the main body member 431 contacts the hanging part 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

  However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after the completion of the operation of the swing member 430. Therefore, compared to the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) for tilting the swinging member 430 and the drive motor 462 for driving the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the combined operation unit 400 is changed from the state of FIG. The period to change to the state becomes longer. In other words, in order to immediately change the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 simultaneously. In this case, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in the middle of the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 from the standing state (see FIG. 35) to the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body portion 431 of the swinging member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, and the combined operation unit 400 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hanging part 422b is curved and formed (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swing member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a flat surface) of the main body member 431 is not contact with a surface but contact with a point (line). It is possible to suppress frictional resistance at the contact position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the combined operation unit 400 due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

  For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving upward from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 and the hanging portion 422b of the swinging member 430 is reduced. If it is large, it will be a factor of reducing the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 and the hanging portion 422b of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 tilts with the curved shape of the hanging part 422b, so that the hanging part 422b applies a driving force to the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430. A relationship to give arises. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden of the drive motor 433 causing the swinging member 430 to tilt.

  Further, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving downward from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b. When resistance is large, it becomes a factor which reduces the moving speed of the main-body member 410. FIG. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 and the hanging portion 422b of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. In addition, since the hanging part 422b is formed so as to be inclined obliquely backward and the back surface side of the main body member 431 is formed in a flat shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while contacting each other, the hanging part 422b and the main body member 431 do not catch each other.

  Therefore, the combined operation unit 400 is prevented from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted. Therefore, the state of the combined operation unit 400 can be changed immediately by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted.

  Next, the swing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 500. 38 and 39 show a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position.

  The swing operation unit 500 is composed of a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), but since the technical configuration is common, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the left side operation of the pair of left and right operation units is performed. The unit will be described as a swing operation unit 500.

  40 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the swing operation unit 500. 40, the fastening hole 527 is partially enlarged, and in FIG. 41, the bridge member 528 is partially enlarged.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the swing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base member 510 and shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends, and one side shaft support hole 522 formed in the base member 510. The distance between the center axes of the elongated plate-shaped drive side arm member 520 that is pivotally supported by the shaft and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520. , 526 has a length equivalent to the distance between the central axes, and one side axial support hole 532 of one end is supported by the base member 510 so as to be swingable. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 that is pivotably supported by the other side shaft supporting hole 526 of the driving side arm member 520 and the other side shaft supporting hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the driving side arm member 520. The driving force for swinging And a front plate member 560 that is disposed on the front side of the base member 510 with the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 interposed therebetween and to which the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Prepare.

  The base member 510 has a plate-like main body portion 511, a plurality of shaft support portions 512 protruding in a columnar shape from the right side of the main body portion 511 in front view, and a lowermost first of the shaft support portions 512. A drive gear receiving hole 513 formed on the left side of the triaxial portion 512c in front view, a photosensor 514 disposed on the right side of the shaft support portion 512, and a rectangular shape from the left side portion of the main body portion 511 in front view to the front side. And a lower support portion 515 protruding in a shape.

  The main body portion 511 is formed so that the height of the upper end portion is different between the left side in the front view and the right side in the front view of the first shaft portion 512a. That is, a step-down portion 511a with the upper side surface lowered by one step is provided on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a in front view.

  The step-down portion 511a has the effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 8). Further, in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, for example, when the driven arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven arm member 530 and the main body 511 may come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). Thereby, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position toward the extended position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the extended position toward the retracted position, the driven arm member 530 and the main body 511 are moved. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be smoothly moved.

  The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and whose shafts are parallel to each other, and in order from the top, one end portion of the driven arm member is pivotally supported. A shaft portion 512a, a second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is pivotally supported, and a third shaft portion 512c on which a transmission gear 553 engaged with the drive gear 552 is pivotally supported. Prepare mainly.

  The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole into which a stepped portion that projects to the back side of the drive gear 552 is fitted.

  The lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower surface of the other end of the drive side arm member 520 in a state where the drive side arm member 520 is disposed at the retracted position, and the other end of the drive side arm member 520 The portion is prevented from further swinging downward.

  The drive side arm member 520 is a member formed from a resin material, and has a main body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape, and one end portion of the main body plate portion 521 (an end portion on the right side in front view). ) In which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a semicircle centered on the one side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 having gear teeth engraved on the outer periphery thereof, a sensor passage plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 523 to the front side, a one-side shaft support hole 522, A collar member 525 having a through hole arranged coaxially and fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body plate portion 521, and the other end portion (the left end portion in front view) of the main body plate portion 521 are formed in the front-rear direction. The second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via a collar. A pair of fastening holes 527 including a pair of fastening holes 527a1 and 527b1 which are disposed near the other end of the main body plate 521 and are drilled in the front-rear direction. 527 mainly includes a bridge member 528 through which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted and fastened.

  The main body plate portion 521 includes a raised portion 521a at one end portion (right end portion in FIG. 40) which is inserted into the guide hole portion 563 and to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the tip.

  The gear portion 523 is a portion that meshes with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the driving device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that covers the front side.

  In this embodiment, the umbrella part 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear teeth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily need to cover the entire gear teeth 523, and is formed in such a manner as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, so that the umbrella portion 523a becomes the second gear portion. It becomes possible to come into contact with 553b, and the wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

  The sensor passage plate 524 is a member disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion that is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. 524a and a sensor passage plate portion 524b extending from the fastening portion 524a in the radial direction around the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state.

  The sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that is disposed opposite to the front side surface of the front plate member 560 and that passes through the inside of the photosensor 514. Here, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can come into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passage plate portion 524b comes into contact with the front plate member 560, so The axis collapse with respect to the biaxial part 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that can detect that the drive-side arm member 520 is placed in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photosensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used for both an increase in resistance to deformation (shaft collapse) of the driving side arm member 520 and detection of the posture of the driving side arm member 520.

  The collar member 525 is a plate-like member formed in a substantially rhombus shape whose outer shape is rounded, and a main body portion 525a having a circular outer shape whose diameter is an end portion in the short direction of the outer shape, and its main body An outer fitting hole 525b drilled in the center of the portion 525a, a pair of fastening portions 525c that are disposed on both the left and right sides of the main body portion 525a, are formed with tapered tips, and are fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 521; Is mainly provided.

  The pair of fastening hole portions 527 includes a first fastening hole portion 527a to which the first bridging member 528a is fixed and a second fastening hole portion 527b to which the second bridging member 528b is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other side shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is disposed) of the driving side arm member 520, so A long distance from the support hole 522 can be secured. Therefore, as will be described later, even when the driven arm member 530 abuts on the bridge member 528 and the drive side arm member 520 may be twisted and deformed, the deformation is fixed by the fastening hole 527 and the one side shaft support hole 522. Can be generated by using a long distance between them (the twist angle per predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, a load applied to the second shaft portion 512b from the one-side shaft support hole 522 (a load in a direction in which the second shaft portion 512b is folded and folded) can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

  The first fastening hole 527a is formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridging member 528a is fastened and fixed, and the auxiliary projection 528a3 is inserted. And a first pinning hole 527a2 in which the first bridge member 528a is fixed in a non-rotatable manner.

  The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2 are disposed along a line that forms a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the short side direction of the driving side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .

  The second fastening hole 527b is formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridging member 528b is fastened and fixed, and the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is inserted therethrough. A second pinning hole 527b2 in which the second bridging member 528b is fixed in a non-rotatable manner, and a base portion 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. .

  The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 are arranged along a line that forms a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the short side direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). . That is, when the second bridge member 528b bends and deforms toward the front side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the drive side arm member 520 is defined as the twist direction (the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520). It can be divided by the bending direction (direction in which the drive side arm member 520 is bent to the front side). Accordingly, when the second bridge member 528b receives a load from the driven arm member 530 and is deformed by bending, it is possible to suppress the drive side arm member 520 from being twisted and deformed around the longitudinal direction.

  The bridge member 528 is disposed on the opposite side of the other-side shaft support portion 526 with the first bridge member 528a disposed on the side closer to the other-side shaft support portion 526 and the first bridge member 528a interposed therebetween. And a second bridge member 528b which is formed larger (longer and wider in the short direction) than the first bridge member 528a.

  The first bridge member 528a has a main body portion 528a1 formed in a long plate shape, an insertion portion 528a2 inserted into the first fastening hole 527a1 and fastened and fixed, and protruded adjacent to the insertion portion 528a2. The auxiliary projection 528a3 to be formed, the rib portion 528a4 formed along the side edge near the other side shaft support hole 526 of the main body portion 581a1 and projecting toward the back side, and the end of the rib portion 528a4 And an inclined portion 528a5 which is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body 528a1 is formed with a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion that is inserted into a first pinning hole 527a2 that is formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. Two points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1, thereby suppressing contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and driven arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it can easily come into contact with the member 530. Details thereof will be described later.

  The second bridge member 528b protrudes adjacent to the main body portion 528b1 formed in a long plate shape, the insertion portion 528b2 inserted into the second fastening hole 527b1 and fastened and fixed, and the insertion portion 528b2. An auxiliary projection 528b3, a rib portion 528b4 formed along the side edge near the other-side shaft support hole 526 of the main body portion 581b1, and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528b4 And an inclined portion 528b5 that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body 528b1 is formed with a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a portion that is inserted into a second pinning hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. Two points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, thereby suppressing contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48) and the driven side arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it can easily come into contact with the member 530. Details thereof will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridge member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven arm member 530 rather than a width of a portion fastened to the drive side arm member 520 of the main body 528b1 (see FIG. 41). It is formed narrower. Thereby, when the driven arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b, it is possible to suppress the second bridge member 528b from being twisted about the longitudinal direction (flexible along the longitudinal direction). Can be easier).

  Therefore, when the driven arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other, the second bridge member 528b can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the deformation mode can be limited. In this case, the arrangement position of the portion (second pinning hole 527b2) that prevents the second bridging member 528b from turning over can be limited, and therefore the configuration of the second bridging member 528b can be simplified. . That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the short direction of the second bridge member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

  The driven arm member 530 is a member made of a resin material, and has a main body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape, and one end portion of the main body plate portion 531 (an end portion on the right side in front view). ) And is drilled in the front-rear direction at the other end (left end in front view) of the main body plate portion 531 and the one side shaft support hole 532 through which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted. The first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 mainly includes the other-side shaft support hole 533 that is supported by a collar.

  The main body plate portion 531 has a front side surface formed on the same plane as the front side surface of the drive side arm member 520.

  The moving member 540 is formed in a block shape that is long in the left-right direction and has a main body portion 541 that is formed with a curved surface with a convex downward surface on the upper surface, and a columnar protrusion on the rear side on the right side of the main body portion 541 in rear view. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 provided, and an alignment portion 543 protruding from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

  In the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed so as to be thicker toward the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 42 (a)). It is formed on the side where the member 540 abuts and at a position separated from the driven arm member 530 to the front side (see FIG. 42).

  The shaft support portion 542 is formed with the same inter-axis distance as the inter-axis distance between the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and the arrangement of the pair of relative axes in the state shown in FIG. 38 is the first. The shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b are formed of a pair of shafts formed in the same arrangement as the shafts, and mainly include a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

  The first shaft portion 542a is a portion that is inserted through the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted through the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. This is the part.

  Here, as described above, the distance between the shaft support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the distance between the shaft support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven arm member 530 are determined. Identical. Further, the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b disposed on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b disposed on the moving member 540 are relatively arranged. The relationship (the direction and distance of a straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed during the swinging of the driving side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

  The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship between the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. The moving member 540 on the right side (see FIG. 8) in the front view is formed with a recess that is recessed so as to be able to receive the alignment portion 543 of the left moving member 540.

  The drive device 550 has a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the back side, a drive gear 552 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 551, and one drive gear 552. The first gear portion 553a at the stage is meshed, and the transmission gear 553 is meshed with the second gear part 553b at the second stage meshed with the gear portion 523 of the drive side arm member 520.

  The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two stages of gear teeth having different diameters are formed coaxially, and includes a first gear portion 553a formed from a large-diameter gear disposed to face the base member 510, and the first gear portion 553a. A second gear portion 553b formed from a gear having a smaller diameter than the first gear portion 553a disposed on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and a hole formed in the center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. And a shaft support hole 553c that is supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

  The front plate member 560 includes a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 that is recessed in the same arrangement as that of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passage plate 524. And a guide hole portion 563 formed in an arc shape along the movement locus.

  The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equivalent to the diameter of each column of the shaft support portion 512, and the distal end portion of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is fitted and fixed. Thereby, since both ends of the shaft support portion 512 can be supported, the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operations of the driving side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped long hole through which the raised portion 521a protruding from the driving side arm member 520 toward the sensor passage plate 524 is inserted, and extends in the front-rear direction at the lower end. The stopper wall part 563a is provided. As a result, even if the drive side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the guide hole portion 563 and the movement is restricted. The position of the drive side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

  The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the moving member 540 from swinging beyond the movable range when the moving member 540 is moved toward the extended position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall 563a, the sensor passage plate 524, and the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed are brought into contact. The The stopper wall portion 563a extends not only to the front side but also to the back side. As a result, the contact area between the one end of the drive side arm member 520 and the stopper wall 563a can be increased, and the sensor passage plate 524 and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the time of contact. The stress applied to can be reduced.

  With reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the end of the movable range of the swing operation unit 500 will be described. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the swing operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 42 (a). 42 illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 43 illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (both are swung to the overhanging position), the side surfaces (the right side surface in FIG. 43) that face each other remain parallel. Since they are close to each other, it is possible to easily fit the pair of moving members 540 by fitting the alignment portions 543.

  In a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the bridge member 528 is put on the side surface of the driven side arm member 530 on the front side. Further, since the distance between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the protruding position. Thus, the swinging of the drive side arm member 520 can be stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut in the left-right direction (the right side in FIG. 42). In the direction, the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 are formed apart from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the bridge member 528 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the driving side arm member 520 is extended in a manner to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening location of the 1st bridge member 528a and the 2nd bridge member 528b is demonstrated. Due to the difference in the fastening location, the ease of turning the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b from the driving side arm member 520 is different.

  Here, “turn over” means that the bridging member 528 receives a force from the driven arm member 530 upward in FIG. 44 and is peeled off from the driving side arm member 520.

  44A is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the first bridge member 528a along the line XXXIVIVa-XXXIVIVa of FIG. 43, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the 2nd bridge member 528b in the -XXXIVb line.

  First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44B, the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 that receive the second bridge member 528b are different from the first fastening hole portion 527a. A base portion 527b3 is formed. Accordingly, the second embedded width Wb1 that is the embedded width of the insertion portion 528b2 into the second fastening hole 527b1 is longer than the first embedded width Wa1 that is the embedded width of the insertion portion 528a2 into the first fastening hole 527a1. Is done. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can be firmly fixed as compared with the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is more difficult to turn than the first bridge member 528a).

  As a second difference, the first overhanging width Wa2 that is the overhanging width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state is the overhanging width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is shorter than the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can suppress deformation near the fastening position as compared to the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is more resistant to the first bridge member 528a). It ’s hard to compare.)

  As a third difference, the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven arm member 530 with respect to the first pin fastening hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44 (a)), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is the second fastening hole 527b1. A 2-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven arm member 530 (see FIG. 44B).

  In this case, the driven arm member 530 moves in the direction (upward in FIG. 44) close to the bridge member 528 (bend deformation, collapse deformation), and is fastened when a load is applied from the driven arm member 530 to the bridge member. There is a difference in how to endure the part.

  That is, when the first bridge member 528a is pushed by the driven arm member 530 and the main body portion 528a1 bends from the insertion portion 528a2, the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is separated from the drive side arm member 520 (FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, a resistance force against turning of the main body portion 528a1 is generated by the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner surface of the first pinning hole 527a2.

  On the other hand, the second bridge member 528b is pushed by the driven arm member 530 so that the main body portion 528b1 bends with the insertion portion 528b2 as a starting point, and the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 presses against the drive side arm member 520. (See FIG. 44B). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pinning hole 527b2, the seating surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 is the side surface on the front side of the main body plate 521 (upper side in FIG. 44 (b)). The resistance against turning of the main body portion 528b1 is generated by being pressed against.

  Accordingly, the resistance force of the second bridge member 528b against turning up can be made larger than the resistance force against the turning up of the first bridge member 528a.

  Note that the inter-axis distance between the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed longer than the inter-axis distance between the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2.

  Due to the difference from the first to the third described above, a similar load is applied from the driven arm member 530 to either the first bridge member 528a or the second bridge member 528b toward the front side (upward in FIG. 44). When compared with the first bridge member 528a, the second bridge member 528b has a resistance force at the base portion against turning (a force that can withstand turning up at the fastening position with the driving side arm member 520). growing.

  With reference to FIG. 45, an aspect of contact between the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 when the driven arm member 530 is bent and deformed will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swing operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXVa in FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) show the driven side from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit 500 which showed a mode that the arm member 530 bent to the front side in time series.

  45A shows a state in which the longitudinal directions of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel, and in FIG. 45B, the driven side arm member 530 is on the front side (FIG. 45). FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the bent side arm member 530 is further bent to the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (b). A state of contacting the bridge member 528b is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridge member 528a is disposed closer to the moving member 540 than the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven arm member 530 bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 or contact with other members, the first bridge is first moved in a stage where the amount of bending is small. The driven arm member 530 comes into contact with the bridge member 528a (see FIG. 45B). Thereafter, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the second bridge member 528b contacts the driven arm member 530 (see FIG. 45C).

  That is, since the displacement of the driven arm member 530 is greater in the portion that is in contact with the first bridge member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridge member 528a than in the second bridge member 528b. It is done.

  Here, when the resistance against the bending deformation of the first bridge member 528a is as large as that of the second bridge member 528b, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed even if the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases. Otherwise (instead, the drive side arm member 520 is bent). In this case, the driven-side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and there is a situation where only the first bridging member 528a receives the load from the driven-side arm member 530 alone. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridging member 528a is fastened to the driving side arm member 520 in a manner that the first bridging member 528a is easier to turn at the root portion than the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is easily turned before the driven arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridging member 528b (deforms relative to the driving arm member 520 near the root).

  In addition, the width of the first bridge member 528a is narrower than that of the second bridge member 528b, and the plate thickness is formed equal (see FIG. 44). That is, the section modulus of the second bridge member 528b in the same direction is larger than the section modulus of the first bridge member 528a in the direction of the load applied from the driven arm member 530 to the bridge member 528. Is done. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is more easily bent in the vertical direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 45 (a)) than the second bridging member 528b.

  As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can contact the driven arm member 530 and receive a load (see FIG. 45C), and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridge members 528 to be borne. Since it can do, durability of the 1st bridge member 528a and the 2nd bridge member 528b can be improved.

  The method of receiving the load from the driven arm member 530 by the pair of bridge members 528 is not limited to bending the first bridge member 528a. For example, by making the first overhanging width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridge member 528a longer than that of the present embodiment, the driven-side arm member 530 and the first bridge in the deflection amount of FIG. 45 (b). The pair of bridge members 528 may begin to contact the driven side arm member 530 at the same time with the bending amount of FIG. In this case, both the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b can receive the load from the driven arm member 530, and the load is applied to the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b. Can be distributed and paid.

  On the other hand, when the amount of bending is small (see FIG. 45 (b)), the driven arm member 530 does not come into contact with any of the pair of bridge members 528, so it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven arm member 530. (Until the amount of bending shown in FIG. 45C is reached, the bending is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven arm member 530).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven arm member 530 into contact with the first bridge member 528a (FIG. 45). (See (b)). In addition, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the driven arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other. Accordingly, the pair of bridge members 528 can receive the load from the driven arm member 530 and can distribute and load the load to the pair of bridge members 528, so that the first bridge member 528a and The durability of the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship of the driving side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the bridge member 528 will be described. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 46, for easy understanding, only a cross-sectional view of the elongated portions of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shown, and the shape of the end portion of each arm member 520, 530 is omitted. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are formed so that the front side surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 46) is substantially flush with the bridge member 528 being the driven side arm member 530. It is put on the front side. Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bend deformation or fall deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 moves toward the back side along the arrow B2 (flexion deformation or fall deformation). Or the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented from rotating (twisting deformation) along the arrow B3. That is, when the bridge member 528 and the driven arm member 530 are brought into contact with each other, the relative movement (deformation) between the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is disposed on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of the arm members 520 and 530. (See FIG. 42). As described above, since the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side on which the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 43), the driven side arm member 530 is more forward than the driving side arm member 520. There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 falls forward, the driven side arm member 530 is supported (contacted) from the front side. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the driven arm member 530 from moving to the front side (the front side in FIG. 43), and accordingly, it is possible to suppress the movement member 540 from moving to the front side.

  Since the driving side arm member 520 is a member to which a driving force is transmitted, there is a possibility that the driving side arm member 520 may wobble in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the transmission state. The wobble can be suppressed by the bridge member 528 and the driven arm member 530 coming into contact with each other.

  On the other hand, when the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bend deformation or collapse deformation) or rotates clockwise (twist deformation) in the direction opposite to the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridging member 528 is moved in a direction away from the driven arm member 530, it is difficult to suppress the movement of the driving arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable that there is a mechanism for preventing these movements. Next, referring to FIG. 47, it is possible to suppress the drive side arm member 520 from moving to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending movement or falling deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 is in the direction opposite to the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (twist deformation) will be described.

  47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXV-XXXXV in FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side in FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is abutted from the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and in addition, the umbrella portion 523a is abutted from the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. (See FIGS. 48 to 50).

  Therefore, when the side of the driving side arm member 520 that is close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (twist deformation in the direction opposite to the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 presses against the first gear portion 553a. And the umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (torsional deformation) of the driving side arm member 520 in the reverse direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passage plate 524 is disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the drive side arm member 520. Thereby, when the other end portion (right side in FIG. 47) of the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bend deformation or collapse deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft portion 512b. The deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased by the sensor passage plate 524 coming into contact with the front plate member 560 at the portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the other end portion of the driving side arm member 520 from moving in the direction of the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed with a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the collar member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end portion of the driving side arm member 520 in a front view, so that the base member 510 and the driving side arm member are formed by the collar member 525. The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact resistance when the drive-side arm member 520 is swung can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described. 48 to 50 are front views of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. FIG. 48, the state in which the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are disposed at the retracted position is the same as in FIG. 42. In FIG. 49, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm are changed from the state of FIG. FIG. 50 illustrates a state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 50 illustrates a state in which the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the overhanging position. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the sensor passage plate 524 is not illustrated, and the collar member 525 and a part of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 are hidden lines. While being illustrated, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted, and the gear teeth are visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened from the retracted position toward the extended position. Therefore, the area that the bridging member 528 covers the driven arm member 530 increases as it moves from the retracted position to the extended position, and the bridge member 528 moves to the front side and contacts the bridging member 528 when the bridge member 528 contacts the bridging member 528. The resistance force generated from the bridge member 528 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are formed on the one side shaft supporting hole 532 and the other side shaft supporting hole of the driven side arm member 530. It is formed below a straight line connecting 533. Therefore, in the retracted position, the driven side arm member that may change its posture in such a manner that the upper part of the straight line connecting the one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between 530 and the bridge member 528 can be kept large. Thus, when the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are started from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 is tilted forward and comes into contact with the bridge member 528, so that the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side member are It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are disposed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the driven arm member 530. . Therefore, in the extended position, the distance between the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528, which may change its posture in a manner of falling and deforming from the one side shaft support portion 532, can be reduced. Accordingly, at the extended position, the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from the amount of deformation of the falling deformation of the driven arm member 530 that is small.

  That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress the swing resistance when the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven side arm member 530 is disposed at the extended position. In this state, the driven arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from the small amount of deformation of the driven arm member 530 that falls down.

  In addition, the bridge member 528 is at least partially disposed on the front side of the driven arm member 530 while the drive side arm member 520 is moving from the state where it is disposed at the retracted position to the state where it is disposed at the extended position. . As a result, while the bridge member 528 is not disposed on the front side of the driven side arm member 530, the driven side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction, and the side surface disposed opposite to the driving side arm member 520 of the driven side arm member 530. And the bridge member 528 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other. In addition, since the driven arm member 530 can always contact the bridge member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial displacement of the driven arm member 530 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are on the side on which the pair of moving members 540 come into contact (right side in FIG. 50) Take a posture inclined to the other side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the drive motor 551 needs to continue to operate in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (in order to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 50). Therefore, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, since it can suppress that the drive side arm member 520 rotates counterclockwise in front view, it is unnecessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. In addition, the power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

  As described above, the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the driving side arm member 520 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left side in FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

  That is, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not only from the meshing with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, but the side surface and the gear on the front side (front side in FIG. 48) of the first gear portion 553a. Transmission can also be achieved by contact with the back side surface of the portion 523. In other words, the swing resistance of the driving side arm member 520 is reduced. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be reduced in size.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a short direction which is a right angle direction thereof, and the longitudinal direction is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. The drive side arm member 520 is fastened and fixed. Accordingly, the collar member 525 and the base member along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 are compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are brought into contact with each other along the short side direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range in which 510 is contacted is increased.

  Therefore, the other end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 48) of the drive side arm member 520 starts from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40) inserted through the one side shaft support hole 522, and the front and rear direction (FIG. 48). When the deformation is bent in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface, the range in which the collar member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be increased. Thereby, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

  Further, a straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 always intersects the circular outer shape of the main body 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. Thereby, the center distance between the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to a minimum length.

  In other words, it is not necessary to place the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. The inter-axis distance with the central axis of 553 can be formed short. The distance between the axes is a distance at which at least the main body 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. Thereby, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

  Further, even when the distance between the center axis of the collar member 525 and the center axis of the transmission gear 553 is the same, the fastening portion 525c is located between the center axis of the collar member 525 and the center axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area in the axial direction between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the drive-side arm member 520 can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the bridging member 528 of the swing operation unit 500 is not fixed has been described. However, the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment includes the main body portion 2561 of the front plate portion 2560. A thickening portion 2561a that accommodates the tip of the bridging member 2528 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B are partial front views of the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. 51A illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 51B illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the main body portion 2528 a of the bridge member 2528 is formed across the width direction of the driven arm member 530. Thereby, when the driven arm member 530 moves to the front side (the front side in FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a that contacts the driven arm member 530 is set to the first embodiment. It can be enlarged in comparison, and the movement of the driven arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  The main body 2561 of the front plate member 2560 has a thickened portion 2561a formed by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end thereof, and is recessed downward from the upper end surface of the thickened portion 2561a. Storage portion 2561b.

  The housing portion 2561b is a recess that is recessed in a state where the four sides are closed in a top view, and in the state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the recess that houses the distal end portion of the bridge member 2528. It is. The inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b includes a movement locus of the distal end portion of the bridging member 2528 (the upper distal end portion in FIG. 51A) (the distal end portion of the bridging member 2528 is moved during the movement of the moving member 540). It is formed in such a manner that it does not come into contact with the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b. This prevents the bridging member 2528 from coming into contact with the inner side surface in the rotational direction of the drive side arm member 2520 in the inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b while moving the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the extended position. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, for example, when the driven-side arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls and deforms) and places a load on the bridge member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

  That is, when the leading end of the bridging member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridging member 2528 is cantilevered and resists the load from the driven arm member 530 (the load toward the front side in FIG. 51). (The bridging member 2528 is fastened to the driving side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the leading end of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, a resistance force can be generated by supporting both ends against the load from the driven arm member 530 (fastening with the driving arm 2520). Position and the storage portion 2561b). Thereby, it can suppress that the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side.

  Further, since the bridging member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the driving side arm member 2520, the front end portion of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, so that the driving side arm member 2520 is aligned in the front-rear direction. be able to.

  In this case, the moving members 540 of the swing operation unit 2500 formed as a pair of left and right can be aligned in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are disposed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 8). , It is possible to suppress the relative displacement in the front-rear direction from occurring in the pair of moving members 540. Since the accommodating portion 2561b is disposed at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) between the pair of moving members 540 as compared with the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 generated from the accommodating portion 2561b as starting points. Can be reduced.

  Thereby, the effect of correcting the positional deviation between the pair of moving members 540 can be secured, and the pair of moving members 540 can be visually recognized integrally in a state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the extended position. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer side surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described. However, the swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment is stretched outward from the umbrella portion 523a. A protruding portion 3523b is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) is a swing along the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation | movement unit 3500. In FIG. 52, for easy understanding, only the base member 3510, the driving side arm member 3520, and the driving device 550 are illustrated, and the other members are omitted, and the photosensor 514 and the driving of the base member 3510 are illustrated. Illustration of the sensor passage plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

  FIG. 52A illustrates a state where the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 52B illustrates the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member. 540 (see FIG. 7) is shown rotated by a predetermined angle from the retracted position, and in FIG. 52 (c), the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the overhanging position. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the drive side arm member 3520 includes an overhanging portion 3523b that extends outward from the umbrella portion 523a in the axial radial direction. The overhanging portion 3523b is disposed below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the driving side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52B). In other words, during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is disposed opposite to the back side of the overhang portion 3523b.

  The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 that is curved and formed along the outer periphery of the umbrella part 523a on the outer side in the axial radial direction of the umbrella part 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is projected from the front side of the main body portion 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the side surface on the front side of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52D).

  From these, it is possible to suppress the drive side arm member 3520 from moving to the front side (falling deformation or bending deformation) starting from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512. That is, the driving side arm member 3520 moves to the front side (falling deformation or bending deformation) above the second shaft portion 512b due to the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and below the second shaft portion 512b. Moves to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a abutting against the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhang portion 3523b abuts against the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. Thereby, the movement (falling deformation or bending deformation) of the driving side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by contact at two positions.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the driving side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, the driving side arm member 3520 is compared with the case where the driving side arm member 3520 is disposed at another position. The contact position in the front-rear direction between 3520 and the transmission gear 553 can be set to a position spaced apart from the second shaft portion 512b in the axial diameter direction.

  That is, when the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at the overhang position, the umbrella portion 523a is disposed opposite to the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the overhang portion 3523b is disposed in the second gear portion. The main body portion 553b is opposed to the front side surface. In this case, the overhang portion 3523b can contact the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement is not seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

  Further, in the state in which the driving side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the driving side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, and thus the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is used. This is a state where movement in the front-rear direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position of the drive side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position spaced apart from the second shaft portion 512b in the axial radial direction. Resistance to the movement of 3520 in the front-rear direction can be increased and the movement can be suppressed.

  Next, the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth long hole without catching has been described. However, the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has a recessed portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. 53 and 54, the illustration of the collar member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body portion 410 of the combined operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is disposed at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 contacts the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b. Touch. A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b disposed just above the contact position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is greater than or equal to the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d disposed at the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 comes into contact with the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, the shaft support hole 423d rebounds in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also springs upward due to the vertical rebounding momentum.

  The effect of the recessed portion 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 54A and 54B are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. FIG. 54A shows a state immediately before the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 comes into contact with the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. In FIG. 54B, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is shown. The state immediately after contacting the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is shown. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are not shown for ease of understanding, and the moving direction of the slide shaft portion 423e and the end portion on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted. Are shown by arrows C41 to C44.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft 423e contacts the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, and the end portion of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e is along the arrow C44. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e comes into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

  Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated for the slide shaft portion 423e that attempts to move in the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the slide shaft part 423e moves along the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. Note that the slide shaft portion 423e is driven along the left-right direction inside the guide hole 4424b by moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the driving device 460.

  Next, the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the end of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft portion 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described. However, the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is configured to slide the connecting member 5423. A plate spring member 5425, which is a plate-like spring member that comes into contact with the end portion on the shaft portion 423e side, is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left-right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

  The connecting member 5423 includes a protruding portion 5423f that protrudes from the end of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The protruding portion 5423f protrudes vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 disposed at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, and is also on the right side in the rear view (FIG. 56C). The corner on the right side is rounded and chamfered, and the corner on the left side in rear view is formed with a right angle.

  The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c that protrudes in a U-shape from the back side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer end of the pair of guide holes 424b. The holding part 5424c is formed in such a manner that the open side of the U-shaped part is directed inward in the left-right direction, and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped part.

  Details of the leaf spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A to FIG. 56C are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is illustrated along the time series, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side in the rear view is partially illustrated. ) Shows a state in which the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 56B shows a state in which the main body member 410 has moved from the retracted position toward the intermediate position by a predetermined distance. In c), the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position is illustrated.

  For ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the leaf spring member 5425 are shown, and the other members are not shown. In addition, the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 are only shown in the outer shape, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the leaf spring member 5425 is arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the left-right direction, and one end portion is fixed to a linear plate-like fixed portion 5425a held by the holding portion 5424c. A curved portion 5425b connected to the other end of the fixed portion 5425a and projecting toward the connecting member so as to be bent; and an end portion on the inner side (right side in FIG. 56 (a)) of the curved portion 5425b. And a fall prevention portion 5425c extended to the main.

  The curved portion 5425b is formed such that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed on the inner side in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. In other words, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is decreased), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is rapidly inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to a right angle).

  The fall prevention portion 5425c is in contact with the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is disposed at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56 (a)) of the guide hole 424b. As a result, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 opposite to the grip portion 5424c may hang down due to aging or the like, the projecting portion 5423f causes the leaf spring member 5425 to move in the state of FIG. Since it lifts, the arrangement | positioning relationship between the leaf | plate spring member 5425 and the protrusion part 5423f can be maintained. That is, the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c can be prevented from drooping downward.

  Here, a change in the direction of the force generated between the protruding portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is disposed at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other, and therefore between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

  As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b, the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the projecting portion 5423f becomes the leaf spring member 5425. Gradually approach and eventually abut (see FIG. 56 (b)). The connecting member 5423 continues to move inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f is gradually moved upward so that the free end side of the leaf spring member 5425 (the right end side in FIG. 56 (b)). The end gradually moves upward.

  When the protruding portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 are in contact with each other, the force F51 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It is transmitted in the normal direction. That is, the force F51 is directed in the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the direction in which the leaf spring member 5425 is bent. In this case, since a component directed in the left-right direction is small in the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51, the leaf spring member 5425 causes the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 to move to the right. The movement of the connecting member 5423 is prevented from being hindered. Thereby, while the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55). can do.

  When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the end portion on the inner side in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end portion on the right side in FIG. 56C) and rebounds, the projecting portion 5423f is bent by the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425. The second inclined surface 5425b2 is abutted (see FIG. 56C).

  In this case, the force F52 applied to the leaf spring member 5425 from the projecting portion 5423f is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the bending portion 5425b. In other words, the force F52 has a large component facing the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Here, elastic deformation in the thickness direction of the leaf spring easily occurs, but elastic deformation in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring hardly occurs. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed to the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to a right angle with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the resistance force of the leaf | plate spring member 5425 with respect to the rebound of the connection member 5423 can be increased, and it can prevent that the connection member 5423 moves. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the end portion on the inner side (right side in FIG. 56C) of the guide hole 424b.

  Further, as described above, the protruding portion 5423f is formed such that the corner on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 56C) is chamfered and the corner on the left side in the rear view is formed with a right angle. As a result, when the corner on the right side of the protruding portion 5423f is in contact with the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56B), it smoothly contacts (does not bite), and on the left side of the protruding portion 5423f in the rear view. When the corner contacts the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56C), the protruding portion 5423f bites into the leaf spring member 5425. That is, the left-hand side corner of the protruding portion 5423f fits between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the leaf spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is driven along the left-right direction inside the guide hole 4424b by moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the driving device 460 (see FIG. 21). In this case, the protruding portion 5423f moves away from the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Next, the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 that guides the wiring is expanded and contracted has been described. However, in the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 that guides the wiring can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement. Formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the overhang position. In FIG. 57, the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480 is shown. In the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480, the wiring W disposed on the inner side of the wiring guide slide 6480 is formed almost linearly with few portions to be bent. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The wiring guide slide 6480 is supported in the extending direction of the first guide slide 6481 that is pivotally supported about the shaft support portion 472 and through which the wiring W is inserted, and the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. The second guide slide 6482 that is slid along the inside and the wiring W is inserted therethrough, and the third guide that is slid along the extending direction of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and that is inserted inside the wiring W. A slide 6483 is mainly provided.

  The first guide slide 6481 has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through-hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (arranged in the front-rear direction) that are opposed to each other among the side surfaces of the main body portion 6481a. A pair of slide long holes 6481b that are formed so as to face each other along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6481a, and a shaft support portion 472 that is drilled in the front-rear direction at the end of the main body portion 6481a. And a cylindrical column portion 6481d bridged in the front-rear direction to the lower end portion of the through-hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

  The extending direction of the slide long hole 6481b and the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a are formed in parallel. The cylindrical portion 6481d is wound with the wiring W from below.

  The second guide slide 6482 is slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6481 and has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6482a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and the main body portion 6482a. A pair of slide long holes 6482b formed facing the pair of side surfaces (side surfaces disposed in the front-rear direction) opposed to each other, and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6482a, and the main body portion 6482a And a pair of projecting portions 6482c that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the first guide slide 6481 and are inserted into the slide long holes 6481b.

  The extending direction of the slide long hole 6482b is formed in parallel with the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide long hole 6481b.

  The second guide slide 6482 is formed such that the projecting portion 6482c is slidable inside the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. During the movement, the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is the main body portion 6481a. The through hole 6481a1 is in contact with the inner side surface. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. Accordingly, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6481, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  The third guide slide 6483 is slidably fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 and has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6483a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction. And a pair of projecting portions 6483b that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and are inserted through the slide long holes 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

  The third guide slide 6483 is formed such that the projecting portion 6383b is slidable inside the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482, and the outer side surface of the third guide slide 6483 is the main body portion 6482a during the movement. Of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner side surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is the distance between the central axis of the projecting portion 6483b and the main body portion 6483a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. Accordingly, when the third guide slide 6383 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  Here, the inner side surface of the first guide slide 6481 and the outer side surface of the second guide slide 6482 are each formed as a smooth surface, while the inner side surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer side surface of the third guide slide 6483 are It is formed with a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 relative to the first guide slide 6481 is formed smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 relative to the second guide slide 6482.

  As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides with priority over the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6481, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 is stored.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial front views of the combined operation unit 6400. FIG. 58A illustrates a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58B illustrates a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. The

  As illustrated in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not have a portion that may pinch the wiring W, and the wiring W can be prevented from being disconnected. Further, since there is no fear of pinching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the guide slides 6481, 6482, 6483 can be reduced. Thereby, the width | variety of the transversal direction of the wiring guide slide 6480 can be suppressed.

  With the main body member 410 disposed at the intermediate position, the wiring W remains inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58A). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W temporarily can be removed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a swing operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridge members 528 are fixed to the driving side arm member 520 has been described. However, the swinging operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridge members 7528. The bridge member 7528a is formed to be swingable with respect to the drive side arm member 7520. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B are partial front views of the swing operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment. 59A shows a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 59B shows a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position, and the moving member 540 is shown. Is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridging member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is formed in the shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the driving side arm member 7520. The shaft is pivotally supported and is urged clockwise by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is the same as the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridging member 7528a is omitted, and a shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed similarly. The second bridge member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

  The driven arm member 7530 includes a projecting portion 7534 that projects from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and contacts the first bridge member 7528a in the swinging direction.

  Here, the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are relatively positioned with respect to the shaft support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534 in a state where the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are disposed in the retracted position. The position changes (similar to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520, the position changes).

  By swinging the first bridging member 7528a along the projecting portion 7534, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the second bridging member 7528b is increased at the extended position (see FIG. 59B). Can be spread. Thereby, when the driven arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions where the bridge member 7528 can abut (the end portion of the first bridge member 7528a and the end portion of the second bridge member 7528b). Can be spread. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven arm member 7530 can freely bend without being brought into contact with the bridge member 7528 can be divided into short portions, and the amount of bending of the driven arm member 7530 (in the front-rear direction). Movement amount).

  As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position. it can. Here, the displacement of the driven arm member 7530 with respect to the driving arm member 7520 is likely to occur in the other-side shaft support hole 533 that is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the displacement width is likely to increase. In the present embodiment, the first bridge member 7528a can be prevented from separating from the other-side shaft support hole 533, and the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven-side arm member 7530 with respect to the drive-side arm member 7520 can be increased. Can do.

  Further, when the driving side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 59A), the first bridge member 7528a is biased by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in the direction approaching the second bridge member 7528b. As a result, the drive-side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b is widened, and the first bridge member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 are moved. Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, a game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where light is emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by being planted on the base plate 8060. Light is irradiated near the upper half of 62. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of a game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed in the embedded hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, the light irradiation device 8610 can prevent the thickness of the game board 8013 from increasing in the front-rear direction.

  From the light irradiation device 8610, light is irradiated to the inside of the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism for changing the traveling direction of the irradiated light to the front side (front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  61 is a partial cross-sectional view of game board 8013 taken along the line LXI-LXI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body portion 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a and a light irradiation portion 8612 disposed on a side surface of the main body portion 8611.

  The game board 8013 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an embedded hole 8013a in which the light irradiating device 8610 is disposed, and extends downward from the embedded hole 8013a over the outer rail 62 along the back of the game board 8013 ( A light projecting passage 8013b which is a recess extending inward of the gaming area, and a mode in which the front end is closer to the lower side (inward of the gaming area) formed at the extending end of the light projecting path 8013b. And a direction changing portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner.

  The embedding hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape on the resin mold.

  A light path E81 emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 is formed inside the light projecting path 8013b and is reflected by reaching the direction changing unit 8013c, so that the traveling direction of the light is changed from the path E81 to the front side (FIG. 61). It changes to the path | route E82 which faces (left side). Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of a light-transmitting resin material, it is inconspicuous and can reduce the influence on the decoration of the game area. it can. Thereby, the design freedom of a game area can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling on the route E82 is irradiated from below on the nail planted in front of the game board 8013. Thereby, the shadow formed under the nail by the illumination of the hole can be brightened. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance performance of the area below the nail and to make it easier to see the ball when it passes through the area below the nail, and to reduce the burden that the player feels because the ball is difficult to see. be able to.

  In particular, since the nail implanted in the upper part of the game board 8013 is arranged at a position that is looked up by the player, the reflected light reflected by the nail is directed to the player by irradiating light from below the nail. be able to. In this way, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member that produces light.

  Note that the lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the sphere, so that the effect on the flow of the sphere is small even if it is processed. For example, by applying crystal processing to the lower part (lower half) of the nail, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the performance performance of the nail can be enhanced.

  In addition, the color of light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 is different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow) (for example, red), so that the nail irradiated with light is distinguished from other nails. Can be easier.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60) may be arranged on the game board 8013, and light may be irradiated in order. That is, light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 on the right side (second from the left end in front view) after light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 on the left end in front view, and then right next (front view) on the front side. Light may be irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610 (third from the left end in view) and may continue in the same manner.

  According to this, the nail implanted in the game board 8013 shines in order along the curved arrow R81 by the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610. For example, when it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike, the player can make a right strike by lighting the nails planted on the game board 8013 in order along the curved arrow R81. Can be signaled. Thereby, since the effect which tells a player where to put a ball | bowl should be given to the nail which forms the flow path of a ball | bowl, the attention power of a nail can be improved.

  Note that the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, light may hit a windmill disposed on the game board 8613, the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60), or the like.

  Next, a wiring guide arm 9480 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except for the shaft support portion, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment The overhanging front locking portion 9482f disposed on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are not shown for easy understanding.

  62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9481 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. 62 (c) is a front view of attachment / detachment. It is a perspective view of the locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f is partially viewed in cross-section, and the fitting portion between the attachment portion 9481d and the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 includes a detachable front locking member 9481f that is detachably attached to the attachment portion 9481d, and plate-like arm portions 9481a from both ends of the linear portion of the attachment portion 9481d. It mainly includes a plate-shaped anti-slip plate portion 9481g extending toward the rear side and an other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extending from the back side of the other-side bottom portion 481e2.

  In the plate-like arm portion 9481a, the formation of the notch portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. In the present embodiment, as described later, the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d, so that the notch portion 481a1 is unnecessary. Thereby, the intensity | strength of the plate-shaped arm part 9481a is securable.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 which is a recess having a semicircular cross section extending in the front-rear direction.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is a semicircular recess with a semicircular cross section into which a columnar fitting arm portion 9481f2 of a detachable front locking member 9481f, which will be described later, is fitted. Direction). As a result, a shape for the fitting recess 9482d1 is added to the molding die of the appendage portion 9481d and pulled out in one direction (FIG. 62 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface), whereby the appendage portion in which the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed. 9481d can be manufactured easily.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius that is the same as or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. As a result, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d.

  In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be increased, and the frictional force can be increased as compared with the case where the attachment portion 9481d and the fitting arm portion 9481f2 are in contact with each other. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f from dropping from the attachment portion 9481d.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f has a long plate-shaped main body plate portion 9481f1 and a plurality of vertically extending columnar shapes from the side surfaces in the thickness direction of the main body plate portion 9481f1. The fitting arm portion 9481f2 is mainly provided.

  Since the detachable front locking member 9481f is removable from the attachment portion 9481d, when the wiring W is replaced, such as when the wiring W is disconnected, the detachable front locking member 9481f is removed to remove the front mounting lock. The trouble of replacing the wiring W by avoiding the member 9481f can be saved, and the replacement of the wiring W can be facilitated.

  The plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are portions that fix the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are arranged in parallel at intervals slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members are connected in series. When the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, the pair of rod-like members of the plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the attachment portion 9481d, and the attachment portion is caused by the elastic recovery force. 9481d is sandwiched.

  Note that the length of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is slightly longer than the length in the width direction of the attachment portion 9481f, and toward the fitting arm portion 9481f2 on the other side that sandwiches the attachment portion 9481f at the tip of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. Thus, a protruding portion 9481f3 is formed. Since the projecting portion 9481f3 is hooked on the attachment portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from coming off from the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (the front side in FIG. 62A).

  In this case, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting depression 9481d1 is formed as a depression having a semicircular cross section. Therefore, when the fitting arm portion 9481f2 holds the attachment portion 9481d with elastic recovery force. The shaft center of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is brought close to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. This makes it easy to align the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d, and shortens the time required for attachment.

  The anti-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W with the plate-like arm portion 481a, and is formed continuously over the width direction (FIG. 62 (b) vertical direction) of the appendage portion 9481d. The attachment portion 9481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction. The distance between the tip of the non-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-like arm portion 481a is normally formed to be equal to or less than the thickness of the wiring W, and the anti-slip plate portion 9481g is inserted by inserting the wiring W therethrough. It is elastically deformed, and the wiring W is prevented from slipping with respect to the plate-like arm portion 481a by the elastic recovery force.

  The direction of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the appendage portion 9481d. Accordingly, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the anti-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wiring W can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  The direction of the pair of anti-slip plate portions 9481g is opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the moving direction of the wiring W. The anti-slip plate portion 9481g is disposed to face the rib portion N. Thereby, since the wiring W can be suppressed at the intermediate portion (antinode), not at the tip portion of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g, the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

  The other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-like portion formed to have the same outer peripheral shape as the other-side bottom portion 481e2, and the other-side tubular portion 481c extends in the circumferential direction of the other-side tubular portion 481c from the back surface of the other-side bottom portion 481e2. And an inclined side surface 9481h1 at the extended tip. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in front view. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from dropping off to the back side (FIG. 64 (a) the back side of the drawing).

  The inclined side surface 9481h1 is inclined to the back side (lower side in FIG. 62 (b)) as the distance from the other side bottom portion 481e2 increases.

  63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is an LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm 9482 in the -LXIIIc line.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes an extended front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end portion of the attachment portion 482d in both directions in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482d, and the attachment portion. 482d and a plate-like arm portion 482a, and mainly provided with a plate-like arm portion 482a and an anti-slip plate portion 9482g extending from the end portion of the plate-like arm portion 482a toward the plate-like arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d.

  The overhanging front locking portion 9482f extends to the extended end extending on the opposite side of the plate-like arm portion 482a with the attachment portion 482d interposed therebetween, and the back surface side (see FIG. 63). (C) It has an inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side.

  Since the technical idea of the anti-slip plate part 9482g is the same as the technical idea of the anti-slip plate part 9482g, the description thereof is omitted here.

  64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is a diagram of LXIVc− in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in a LXIVc line. FIG. 64A shows a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded, and in FIG. 64B, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are rotated and opened. The state is shown. 64A and 64B show the wiring W, and in FIG. 64C, the wiring W is not shown.

  Here, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480 in order to secure the arrangement area of the other movable accessory. For this reason, it is difficult to provide a margin in a region that accommodates the wiring W (for example, between the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, each time the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, the wiring W rubs against the inner surface of the wiring guiding arm 9480, the wiring W deteriorates early, and the durability of the wiring W is improved. May fall.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 in the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the anti-slip plate portions 9481g and 9482g and the plate-like arm portions 481a and 482a, so that the wiring W becomes the plate-like arm portion 481a. , 482a and appendages 9481d, 482d are suppressed from moving relative to each other. Thereby, durability of the wiring W is securable.

  Moreover, when the 2nd guide arm 9482 deform | transforms with the aspect which twists with respect to the 1st guide arm 9481, the wiring W may also be twisted and there exists a possibility that the durability of the wiring W may fall.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 in the present embodiment, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is the second guide arm. It overlaps with one side bottom portion 482e1 of 9482 in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62B).

  Therefore, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship in which they can abut in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction in which the one side bottom portion 482e1 is pressed against the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, the one side bottom portion 482e1 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with the first guide arm 9481. The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

  In the present embodiment, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is in front of and behind the appendage portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. It is formed in a positional relationship that overlaps in the direction and can be contacted in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 64C). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction in which the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is pressed against the attachment portion 9481d with respect to the first guide arm 9481, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d abut against each other. The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

  Further, in the case where the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from this embodiment, the second guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), and the second The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are brought into contact with each other.

  In this case, the back side of the second guide arm 9482 and the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are in contact with each other, so that the front side of the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the back side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the second guide arm 9482 is twisted with respect to the first guide arm 9481 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. In this case, however, the pair of overhanging front locking portions 9482f is the first. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched, it is necessary to increase the accuracy of the alignment of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion for suppressing the twist of the second guide arm 9482 is formed shifted in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are aligned. It is possible to reduce the required level of accuracy.

  In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened from the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A) (see FIG. 64). (B)), the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may come into contact with the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62A) is formed at the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, so that the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h contacts the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1. Also in the case of contact, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be ridden on the back side of the one side bottom portion 482e1 (FIG. 64B, the back side of the paper surface). Thereby, it is possible to easily form a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64A).

  In addition, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded from the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B) (see FIG. 64A). In the meantime, there is a possibility that the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

  On the other hand, an inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63C) is formed at the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, so that the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is connected to the attachment portion 9481d. Even when it comes into contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be ridden on the front side of the attachment portion 9481d (FIG. 64 (a) front side of the paper surface) (see FIG. 64 (c)). Thereby, it is possible to easily form a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the overhanging front locking portion 9482f that abuts on the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front side is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair on the front side and the back side. As a result, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the direction of twist deformation of the second guide arm 9482, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twist-deformed. Can be suppressed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the gap is formed by the pair of decorative members 422 of the combined operation unit 400 swinging has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the decoration member 422 may be guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the pair of decoration members 422 may be slid in a direction away from each other to form a gap for accommodating the swinging member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be ensured in the vertical direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the panel surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a long plate-like movable member that is pivotally supported on the inner side surfaces of the pair of stepped portions 324a and is formed in a pair of left and right is provided, and the movable member is in a direction in which the pair of stepped portions 324a are connected. Is placed in a posture along the longitudinal direction to prevent the passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and the opening is swung upward or downward from that state to allow the passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. The state may be formed. Moreover, you may comprise the 2nd winning opening 640 instead of the specific winning opening 65a by the same structure.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the movable upper lid member 332 of the panel surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described. It is not a thing. For example, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the extended state, a portion that reflects light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the front side may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the light effect can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the alignment portion 543 is combined with the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 by the concave-convex fitting, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a magnet may be provided at a position where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be combined by a magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by magnetic force, and it is not necessary to generate the holding force in the drive device 550 when the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 550 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the combined operation unit 400 is formed in a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be moderated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides in a direction away from the main body member 410, and the decorative member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 of the combined operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be reduced, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 necessary for housing the wiring guide arm 480 outside the opening 211a can be reduced. Thereby, the arrangement area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by the pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, and 7520 and the driven side arm members 530 and 7530 has been described. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by three or more arm members. In this case, for example, the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate arm members, and disposed so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, thereby suppressing the positional deviation between the arm members. Can be improved. That is, of the arm members at both ends, when one arm member pushes one end of the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 and the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 bend, the other end is The arm member moves toward the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. As described above, the arm members at both ends work so as to suppress the bending of the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the plurality of arm members and to stabilize the posture of the moving member 540. Can be made.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 includes a columnar portion (for example, the one-side shaft support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion ( For example, although the case where it is pivotally supported by the other side cylindrical part 481c) was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the portion that supports the columnar portion may be formed by a long hole extending in the longitudinal direction of each guide arm 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, the horizontal expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 slide in the extending direction of the long holes can be performed.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the side surface (for example, plate-like arm portion 481a) below each arm member (for example, first guide arm 481) constituting the wiring guide arm 480. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-like arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may have a longer width than the upper side surface (for example, the appendage portion 9481d). In this case, the wiring W can be prevented from sliding off from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-like arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

  In the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the appendages 481d and 9481d has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the width of the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, since a part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-like arm part 481a and the appendages 481d and 9481d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding part with a finger (hooking with a finger). Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be performed easily.

  In the seventh and ninth embodiments from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the case where the widths of the appendages 481d and 9481d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d is fixed may be formed with the same width as the plate-like arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than the plate-like arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can be protruded from the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with a finger (hanging with the finger). Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be performed easily.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the thickness of the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b may be made thicker than the thickness of the lower side surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be increased as compared with the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423. It is possible to suppress the rebound of the connecting member 423 generated when moving to the position.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft portion 421c is disposed at the lower end portion of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is disposed only at the extending end of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the direction change part 8013c may be additionally provided in the middle of the light projecting path 8013b. In this case, the light reflected to the front side from the direction changing portion 8013c disposed in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b and the light transmitted through the direction changing portion 8013c are disposed at the extended end of the light projecting passage 8013b. The light can be divided into light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights that can be viewed in front view can be increased with respect to the number of light irradiation devices 8610. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning number of the light irradiation apparatus 8610 can be suppressed, maintaining the production effect of the light irradiation apparatus 8610. FIG.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of a technical idea in which a moving member is accommodated between a member that tilts forward and a base member>
A first moving member formed to be movable between a retracted position formed outside the liquid crystal display device and an extended position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and is relatively movable with respect to the first moving member And a second moving member disposed on the front side of the first moving member, and the first moving member forms an overlapping portion overlapping the second moving member in a front view, In the gaming machine, the area of the overlapping portion is larger when the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position than when the first moving member is arranged at the extended position. An auxiliary member that is disposed on the side and formed to be movable toward and away from the first moving member, and the first moving member is disposed in the retracted position. And the second moving member is placed between the auxiliary member and the auxiliary member. Gaming machine A1, wherein is that the.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members are arranged at the front and back, and in the retracted position, an overlapping portion to be overlapped is formed to be large, and an area visually recognized in front view of the plurality of moving members is reduced. In the exit position, there is a gaming machine in which a large effect area is secured by forming the overlapping portion smaller than the retracted position (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to avoid interference between the moving member on the front side and the moving member on the back side, the overlapping portion particularly at the retracted position of the moving member on the back side is formed flat. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the moving member on the back surface side in the projecting position is limited to a flat one, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Here, as a method of solving that the production is limited to a flat one, for example, a method of forming the front side moving member in a three-dimensional manner toward the front side can be considered. However, in this case, since the space on the front side of the moving member on the front side is limited, it is not possible to form a front / rear difference that forms the moving member on the back side in three dimensions.

  Further, as a method of solving that the production is limited to a flat one, for example, a portion that does not overlap with the front side moving member is made on the back side moving member, and from the back side moving member to the front at that point A method of disposing a member that moves in a direction toward and away from the head is considered. However, in this case, the portion of the rear-side moving member provided as a portion that does not overlap with the front-side moving member protrudes outward from the front-side moving member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. This makes it difficult to narrow the arrangement space when the front side moving member and the rear side moving member are arranged at the retracted position, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for arranging the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary member is arranged on the front side of the first moving member and is formed so as to be movable in the direction approaching and separating from the first moving member, and the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position. In this state, the second moving member can be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference between the auxiliary member disposed on the first moving member and the second moving member, to reduce the arrangement space of these members, and to arrange the auxiliary member on the front side of the second moving member. Compared with the case where it installs, a three-dimensional effect can be performed using wide front and back space.

  Further, in the extended state in which the second moving member is not accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the auxiliary member is disposed close to the first moving member, so that the first moving member and the auxiliary member are disposed between each other. The dead space can be suppressed, and it is possible to easily dispose another member on the front side of the auxiliary member.

  Note that the movement mode of the auxiliary member is not particularly limited, and may be a mode in which the movement direction is formed by a single axis such as a slide movement, a mode in which the rotation axis is defined and rotated around the rotation axis, or a combination thereof. good.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first moving member includes a first supporting portion that supports the auxiliary member, and the first supporting member is moved toward the retracted position, and the second moving member A member is supported between the first moving member and the auxiliary member at an end opposite to the end where the member starts to be accommodated, and the driving force is applied to a point near the first support portion with the first support portion as a fulcrum. When the auxiliary member is actuated to swing, the end of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side moves in a direction toward and away from the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the end of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side is separated from the first moving member by the swinging operation of the auxiliary member with the first support portion as a fulcrum. Thus, a space for accommodating the second moving member is formed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member.

  Here, the first support member swings the end opposite to the end where the first moving member is moved toward the retracted position and the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Support movably. Therefore, even if the operation amount of the first support portion of the auxiliary member is small, the operation amount of the end portion of the auxiliary member that accommodates the second moving member can be increased.

  In this case, the second moving member is compared with the driving distance of the point near the first support part of the auxiliary member by applying a driving force to the point near the first support part of the auxiliary member and swinging the auxiliary member. The end of the auxiliary member on the side that accommodates can be greatly separated from the first moving member.

  Therefore, it can suppress that a 2nd moving member and an auxiliary member contact | abut. That is, it is possible to achieve both suppression of the driving distance of the auxiliary member and prevention of contact between the second moving member and the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the side surface of the second moving member that faces the auxiliary member is closer to the end portion closer to the first support portion than the first support portion. A gaming machine A3, which is disposed closer to the first moving member than to the end.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the gaming machine A3 comes close to the first support portion of the second moving member. It starts to be accommodated from the end on the side, that is, the end located on the side close to the first moving member. Therefore, the space | interval between a 2nd moving member and an auxiliary member when a 2nd moving member begins to be accommodated between a 1st moving member and an auxiliary member is securable. Therefore, the second moving member can be prevented from colliding with the first moving member or the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machines A2 and A3, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members that are movably supported by a second support portion formed at an end portion on the side away from the auxiliary member. Each of the two moving members is formed to be movable in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and is formed to be capable of accommodating at least a part of the auxiliary member between the pair of second moving members by the moving operation. A gaming machine A4.

  Here, for example, when the mechanism for swinging the auxiliary member is disposed on the front side of the first moving member, the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member is increased (first In order to move the first moving member and the second moving member in the moving direction of the moving member), it is conceivable to arrange the second moving member on the front side of the mechanism portion. On the other hand, in this case, since the auxiliary member that accommodates the second moving member needs to be moved to the front side (direction away from the first moving member), the space on the front side of the auxiliary member is suppressed, and the auxiliary member is moved. It becomes difficult to form three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 and A3, at least a part of the auxiliary member is accommodated in the space between the pair of second moving members that are separated from each other. Can do. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to move the second moving member to the front side of the mechanism portion of the auxiliary member in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. The first moving member can be disposed close to the first moving member. Thereby, an auxiliary member can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is disposed on a side of the auxiliary member that is close to the liquid crystal display device.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is disposed on the side of the auxiliary member that is close to the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the first moving member is disposed at the retracted position, and the auxiliary member is swung in a direction away from the first moving member, so that the display surface formed on the auxiliary member is inward of the liquid crystal display device (game). To the other side). Thereby, when the 1st movement member is moved to a retracted position, the display surface of an auxiliary member can be turned to the player side, and the effect effect of an auxiliary member can be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of increasing the distance between the end portions of the first support portion on the side where the first moving member and the second moving member of the auxiliary member start to be accommodated and for the purpose of directing the display surface of the auxiliary member to the player side. Can also be used.

<An example of the technical idea for suppressing the bounce of the moving member>
A first moving member formed so as to be movable, a base member formed such that the first moving member is relatively movable, and a second moving member whose one end is connected to the first moving member so as to be guided. A connecting member whose one end is supported by the other end of the second moving member and the other end is connected to the base member in a guideable manner, and a driving force for moving the first moving member. A driving device for generating the first moving member, and the second moving member and the connecting member are moved by the movement of the first moving member, and one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member When either one reaches the end position of the guided range, one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member is the other end of the second moving member. And the supporting point of the one end of the connecting member Gaming machine B1, characterized in that guided in the direction including the dynamic direction of the vertical component.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first moving member, a second moving member connected to the first moving member so that one end thereof can be guided, and one end to the other end of the second moving member A connecting member that supports the end portion and is connected to the base member so that the other end portion can be guided; and a driving device that drives the first moving member. There is a gaming machine in which the member is moved and arranged at different timings at the end positions in a range where one end of the second moving member and the other end of the connecting member are guided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-2008). No. 194313). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first moving member is moved, the end of the movable range is reached first among the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member. When the end portion reaches the end position of the movable range, the support points of the other end portion of the second moving member and the one end portion of the connecting member rebound in the direction opposite to the moving direction so far. In this case, there is a problem that the arrangement of the second moving member and the connecting member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when either one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position of the guided range, The other end of one end or the other end of the connecting member is guided in a direction including a vertical component of the moving direction of the support point of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member. The As a result, the direction in which the support point of the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member rebounds and the guiding direction of one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member are Crossing and resistance occurs in the second moving member or the connecting member. This resistance suppresses the support points of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member from bouncing back. Therefore, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  The connecting member and the second moving member may be fixed at the point where they are supported with each other. That is, the connecting member and the second moving member may be configured to be handled as a unit.

  In the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path that guides the other end of the connecting member, and the other end of the connecting member is at least one of the guide paths of the base member. Braking that suppresses movement of the other end of the connecting member along the guide path on the side surface that receives the other end of the connecting member when the support point bounces A gaming machine B2 comprising a portion.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path that guides the other end of the connecting member. The guide path is connected to the side surface on the side of receiving the other end of the connecting member when the other end of the connecting member reaches at least one terminal position in the guide direction of the base member and the support point bounces back. A braking portion is provided that suppresses movement of the other end of the member along the guide path.

  Therefore, until the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position in the guide direction of the base member, the other end of the connecting member is guided by the base member while suppressing the resistance of movement of the connecting member in the guide direction. After reaching the end position in the direction, the effect of braking the other end of the connecting member can be produced.

  In addition, as a braking part formed in the side surface of a guide path, the recessed part which can accommodate the other edge part of a connection member partially, the high friction part which increased frictional resistance by embossing, and a spring member The spring part etc. to which an elastic force is loaded are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members arranged in parallel in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point, and the one end of the second moving member is guided. The direction of the direction component perpendicular to the direction of movement of the support point is the opposite direction between the pair of second moving members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the direction of the direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the guiding direction of one end of the second moving member is a pair. The second moving members are formed in opposite directions. Therefore, as one end portion of the pair of second moving members is guided and moved by the first moving member, the other end portion of the second moving member is loaded along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point. Force is offset. Thereby, it can suppress that the other edge part of a 2nd moving member shifts in the perpendicular | vertical direction of the moving direction of a support point during the movement of a 1st moving member. Therefore, the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member includes a pair of guide paths that guide the other end of the connecting member, and the connecting member is guided by the separate guide path at the other end. The pair of connecting members are arranged so that the other end of the connecting member extends along the guide path when the other end reaches the terminal position of the guide path. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that direction components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in directions that can be rebounded are opposite to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the other ends of the pair of connecting members reach the terminal position of the guide path of the base member, the other of the connecting members Of the directions in which the end portions of the support members can rebound along the guide path, the direction components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support points are opposite to each other.

  In this case, the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the terminal position of the guide path of the base member, and the support point of the pair of connecting members with the second moving member is in a direction perpendicular to the previous moving direction. When moving (displacement), either one of the pair of connecting members is pressed against the end of the guide path of the base member, and the movement resistance of the pair of connecting members increases. Therefore, it is suppressed that the support points of the second moving member and the pair of connecting members are moved (displaced) in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction so far. Thereby, arrangement | positioning of a 2nd moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B4, the pair of connecting members includes an intermediate portion formed between the one end portion and the other end portion, and the one end portion and the other end portion of the connecting member. A gaming machine B5, which is disposed on a side away from the second moving member as compared to a straight line to be connected.

  Here, for example, when the connecting member is formed of a linear plate-like member, one of the connecting members when the pair of connecting members are disposed at the terminal position on the side protruding toward the inside of the liquid crystal display device. When the end portion of the connecting member is moved, the interval between the connecting member and the second moving member is narrowed, and the connecting member and the second moving member may contact each other.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the intermediate portion of the connecting member is second compared to the straight line connecting one end and the other end of the pair of connecting members. It is arranged on the side away from the moving member.

  For this reason, even when one end of the connecting member is moved when the pair of connecting members are disposed at the end position of the movable range on the side protruding toward the inside of the liquid crystal display device, the connecting member and the second member A sufficient distance from the moving member can be secured, and the connecting member can be prevented from coming into contact with the second moving member. Therefore, the design freedom of the second moving member can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members, and the one end portion of the second moving member is disposed at at least one terminal position in the guide direction. Thus, the pair of second moving members are in contact with each other, wherein the gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, one end of the pair of second moving members is disposed at at least one terminal position in the guide direction, so that the pair The second moving member is brought into contact. Therefore, the position shift of one second moving member of the pair of second moving members can be corrected by contact with the other second moving member. That is, since a pair of second moving members correct each other for positional deviation, the arrangement of the second moving members can be stabilized.

<An example of the technical idea in which the wiring is arranged along the movable member>
In a gaming machine comprising a movable member formed to be movable and a wiring connected to the movable member, one end is connected to the movable member and the other end is outside the liquid crystal display device A gaming machine C1 connected to a back case and provided with a wiring auxiliary member formed to be extendable and extending, the wiring being arranged along the wiring auxiliary member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring is arranged without support from a back case to a moving member (see, for example, JP 2011-245160 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the moving member moves, the wiring takes an unexpected arrangement. For example, the wiring is rubbed with another member, or the wiring is sandwiched between other members. There was the problem that there was a risk of falling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the wiring is arranged along the wiring auxiliary member that connects the back case and the moving member, it is possible to predict the arrangement of the wiring, and the wiring is connected to other members. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being rubbed or pinched by another member. Thereby, the durability of wiring can be improved.

  In addition, as a mode of expansion / contraction, the case where it expands / contracts by a folding type, the case where it expands / contracts by a sliding type, the case where it expands / contracts by a bellows, etc. are illustrated.

  Moreover, as wiring, a round wire shape, a flat harness, etc. are illustrated. The flat harness has an advantage that it can be easily set to bend around a certain axis as compared with the round wire.

  In the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of arm members, and the arm members include a long rod-like connecting rod portion, and at least one end of the connecting rod portion. And a support portion that is formed in a columnar shape or a cylindrical shape having a shaft in a direction and rotatably supports the arm members, and the wiring is arranged in a manner that wraps around the support portion. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member is formed of a plurality of arm members that are rotatably supported by the supporting portion formed at the end portion, and the wiring is supported by the supporting portion. Since the arm members are rotated with each other, the wiring can be prevented from being bent at an acute angle.

  In the gaming machine C2, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and the pair of side wall portions are arranged vertically, and are formed below the pair of side wall portions. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the width of the side wall portion is longer than the width of the side wall portion formed above, and the width of at least one side wall portion is shorter than the width dimension of the wiring. .

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, it is possible to easily attach and detach wiring at the time of manufacturing or repairing the gaming machine.

  Here, in order to facilitate the attachment / detachment of the wiring from the arm member, it is effective to set the width of the pair of side wall portions of the arm member to be equal to or smaller than the width of the wiring member so that the wiring member protrudes from the arm member. . However, if the width of the side wall portion is too short, the wiring may fall off from the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, the width of at least one side wall portion is shorter than the width dimension of the wiring, and the width of the side wall portion formed below is longer than the width of the side wall portion formed above. It is formed. Thereby, the area of the side wall portion of the arm member that supports the wiring pressed downward due to gravity is secured, and the wiring can be easily attached to and detached from the arm member while preventing the wiring from falling off the arm member. .

  In the gaming machine C3, the plurality of arm members include a bottom portion that connects one ends of the pair of side wall portions in the short direction, and the wiring has a concave cross-sectional portion formed by the bottom portion and the side wall portions. The support portion includes a lid member disposed at a tip opposite to the bottom portion, and the lid member is disposed to face the support portion from at least the support portion, and the wiring is connected to the support portion. The game machine C4 is extended to a position overlapping the wiring toward the side wall portion sandwiched between the game machine C4 and the game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the arm member forms a concave cross section with the pair of side wall portions and the bottom portion, the wiring is accommodated in the concave cross section portion, and the lid member is disposed at the tip portion opposite to the bottom portion of the support portion. Is done. The lid member extends from at least the support portion to a side wall portion that is disposed opposite to the support portion and sandwiches the wiring with the support portion to a position overlapping the wiring. As a result, even if the wiring is likely to drop from the pair of side wall portions, the lid member is caught by the wiring.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, in the support portion in which the wiring members are bent in the axial direction of the rotation shaft by rotating the arm members, the wiring is likely to be displaced. The lid member can prevent the wiring from dropping from the arm member.

  Further, the number of cover members disposed can be suppressed by disposing the cover member on the support portion where the pair of arm members are supported by each other. That is, when the lid member is formed in the middle of the arm member, it is necessary to form the lid member on each of the pair of arm members, and the number of the lid members required is equal to the number of the arm members. On the other hand, by disposing the lid member on the support portion, the number of lid members disposed can be reduced by one from the number of arm members to be connected.

  In the gaming machine C4, the length of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other is different from the length of the lid member formed along the length direction of the arm members. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the length of the arm members disposed adjacent to each other is different from the length of the lid member formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the lid member fixed to the support portion of the arm member disposed adjacent to the arm member can be shifted in the longitudinal direction of the arm member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lid members from interfering when adjacent arm members are arranged close to each other. In this case, it is possible to achieve both the arrangement of the arm member in a space-saving manner and the prevention of the wiring from falling off by enlarging the lid member.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the arm member is provided on a shaft bottom portion extending from the connecting rod portion side beyond the support portion along the longitudinal direction of the bottom portion, and around the support portion. A wall portion formed in a wall shape, wherein the arm member is pivotally supported by the support portion so as to be pivotable with respect to each other, and the shaft bottom portion is in a rotational direction in which the arm members pivotally supported are separated from each other. When the arm member is disposed at the end position, the arm member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rotation direction of the arm member, and the wall portion is disposed at the end position in the rotation direction where the arm members pivotally supported are separated from each other. A game machine C6, wherein a gap is formed in the direction of rotation of the arm member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the arm members are pivotally supported in the support portion so as to be rotatable relative to each other, and the shaft bottom portion extending from the connecting rod portion side along the longitudinal direction of the bottom portion exceeds the support portion. Formed. Therefore, the arm members that are pivotally supported by each other are pivoted beyond the state in which the arm members are arranged in a straight line by contacting the shaft bottom portion of the support portion at the end position in the rotational direction in which the arm members are separated from each other. It is prevented.

  Thereby, according to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the rotation angle of the arm member is regulated, and the wiring is restricted from being bent in the reverse direction. Can be prevented.

  At the end position in the rotational direction where the arm members are separated from each other, a gap is formed in the wall portion in the rotational direction, so even if the wiring is bent and close to the wall portion, the wiring is sandwiched between the wall portions. Disconnection can be prevented.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is suppressed compared to the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the auxiliary member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the contracted state of the wiring auxiliary member is the rotation generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Since it is suppressed as compared with friction, when the moving member moves in a mode of deforming the wiring auxiliary member from the contracted state to the extended state, the resistance generated in the support portion can be suppressed, and the movement of the moving member It is possible to suppress the driving force required for the operation.

  In addition, when the wiring auxiliary member approaches the extended state when the moving member moves at a high speed, the rotational friction at the support portion increases, so that the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wiring auxiliary member from reaching the extended state while the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member is high, and the pair of arm members from being bent to the opposite side with momentum.

  In addition, as a method of changing the rotational friction in the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, a recess or a hole is provided in the support portion and the sliding surface of the cylinder to partially prevent contact with each other. And the method of changing the area which the hollow and hole formed in a cylinder overlap in a sliding surface according to the state of a wiring auxiliary member is illustrated. In this case, the smaller the area where the depressions and holes formed in the pillars and cylinders of the support portion overlap on the sliding surface, the more the rotational friction can be suppressed (the more the depressions and holes overlap, the more the contact area between the columns and the cylinders). Increases and rotational friction increases).

  Here, for example, in the case where depressions are formed in each of the cylinder and the column, if the cylinder depression and the column depression completely overlap, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the column in the remaining half circuit. On the other hand, if the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column do not overlap, a hollow is formed over the entire circumference of the sliding surface, so that rotational friction is suppressed over the entire circumference. Further, when the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column partially overlap, rotational friction is generated between the cylinder and the column in a region narrower than a half circumference. Thus, the rotational friction between the cylinder and the column can be changed by changing the formation range of the depression on the sliding surface.

  Moreover, the method of spraying powder on a sliding surface instead of a hollow and a hole, and forming the pear ground partially is illustrated. Since the textured surface is formed by dispersing and arranging a plurality of powders on the surface of the textured surface, the larger the surface of the textured surface on the sliding surface, the higher the rotational friction. The smaller the overlapping area of the pear ground formed on the pillar and the cylinder is, the larger the total area of the pear ground acting on the sliding friction on the sliding surface is, so that the rotational friction between the pillar and the cylinder can be increased.

  Moreover, the method etc. which affix a tape with a low friction coefficient instead of a hollow and a hole are illustrated. On the sliding surface, the smaller the overlapping area of the tape attached to the pillar and cylinder of the support portion, the larger the total area that acts on the rotational friction of the tape attached on the sliding surface, so the rotational friction between the column and the cylinder. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape includes a first non-contact portion in which formation of an outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the support portion formed in a cylindrical shape forms an inner peripheral side surface. Is provided with a second non-contact portion in which the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion partially overlap in the radial direction in a state where the arm members are supported. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the overlapping area is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the expanded state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Here, in order to change the rotational friction at the support portion according to the state of the wiring auxiliary member, for example, when forming a textured process on the support portion, the surface shape is smoothed by the friction caused by the rotation of the support portion (planar surface). There is a problem with durability. Further, for example, when a tape with low friction is applied, there is a possibility that the tape may be peeled off due to the rotation of the support portion, and there is a problem in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape includes the first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and is cylindrical. The formed support portion includes a second non-contact portion in which the formation of the inner peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion do not contact each other. The area where the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion overlap in the radial direction is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the expanded state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the reduced state.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is compared with the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. And can be suppressed.

  Since the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion can be easily manufactured in the same shape by manufacturing the mold, the rotational friction of the support portion is changed depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be easily achieved.

  In addition, as a 1st non-contact part and a 2nd non-contact part, the hollow etc. which are dented in the sliding surface of a support part, the hole drilled in the sliding surface of a support part, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machines C2 to C8, a front locking member that is detachably fixed to the connecting rod portion is provided, and the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the locking member is detachably fixed to an end portion in the short side direction of one of the side wall portions and is extended toward the other side wall portion.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged along the longitudinal direction, and one of the pair of side wall portions. A front locking member that is detachably fixed to an end portion in the short direction of the side wall portion of the side wall portion and is formed to project toward the other side wall portion together with the flow.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the wiring is prevented from dropping from the connecting rod portion when the front locking portion is mounted, and the wiring is connected to the connecting rod portion when removed. It can be easily pulled out from.

  As a result, the front locking portion is attached when the moving member is operated to prevent the wiring from falling off, and the wiring can be easily replaced by removing the front locking portion when the moving member is stopped (for example, during maintenance). be able to.

  In the gaming machine C9, the front locking member includes at least a pair of arms, and when the front locking member is fixed to the one side wall, the one side wall is the pair of arms. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that the one side wall portion is sandwiched between arm portions, and the one side wall portion includes a fitting recess formed as a recess into which the arm portion can be fitted.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C9, one side wall is sandwiched between the arm portions of the front locking member, and the arm portion is fitted into the fitting recess at that time. The member can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the one side wall portion. Thereby, position shift with respect to a side wall part of a front locking member can be prevented.

  As a method for preventing the front locking member from coming off from the side wall portion, the arm portion of the front locking member extends beyond the length in the width direction of the side wall portion, and is arranged opposite to the extended end portion. An example is a method in which a protruding portion that protrudes toward the arm portion is provided, and the protruding portion is retained by hooking the protruding portion on the side wall portion. In addition, a hook-shaped retaining portion that presses the front locking member in the direction opposite to the pulling direction from the side wall portion is formed, and there is a method of retaining the hook by hooking the retaining portion on the front locking member. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C10, the pair of arms are formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess is formed as a recess extending in a semicircular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C10, the arm portion is formed in a columnar shape and the fitting recess is formed in a semicircular cross section, so that one side wall portion is sandwiched between the pair of arm portions. When the arm portion is fitted in the fitting recess, the center of the arm portion is brought close to the center of the fitting recess, so that it is possible to facilitate alignment when the front locking member is mounted on one side wall portion. The time required for mounting can be shortened.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes a misalignment suppressing unit that suppresses misalignment of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes a positional deviation suppression unit that suppresses positional deviation of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress the wiring from rubbing against the wiring auxiliary member and being worn.

  In addition, as a position shift suppression part, the hollow formed in the side surface arrange | positioned facing wiring is illustrated, for example, when the connection rod part of a wiring auxiliary member pinches | interposes wiring with a pair of wall part. In this case, for example, the pair of connecting rod portions are rotated in a direction to open each other at the support portion, and the distance between the ends of the pair of connecting rod portions on the support portion side (the distance that goes around in the circumferential direction of the support portion) is reduced. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member by leaving the length of the wiring that goes around the wire. In other words, the extra portion of the length of the wiring that goes around the support portion can be accommodated in the depression formed on the side surface that is disposed opposite to the wiring and absorbed, thereby causing the wiring to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as the positional deviation suppression portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, the gap formed by the opposing side surfaces of the pair of wall portions is a curved shape or A portion formed in a bent shape is illustrated. For example, the case where the clearance gap between which wiring is pinched | interposed is formed in S shape, a rectangular wave shape, or a dogleg shape is illustrated.

  In this case, when the wiring moves in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions, the inner surface of the pair of wall portions and the wiring are compared with the case where the gap formed by the pair of wall portions is formed in a straight line. Since the number of contact points can be increased, the resistance applied to the wiring can be increased. Therefore, it can suppress that wiring moves to the longitudinal direction of a pair of wall part.

  In addition, as the position shift suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, the distance between the pair of wall portions is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring in the vicinity of the support portion. The portion to be illustrated is exemplified. In this case, for example, when the wiring auxiliary member is rotated by the support portion, even if the wiring moves in the radial direction of the support portion, the distance between the pair of wall portions in the vicinity of the support portion is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring. Therefore, the wiring can be held between the pair of wall portions in the vicinity of the support portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring at the intermediate portion of the wiring auxiliary member.

  Moreover, as a position shift suppression part, for example, when the connecting rod part of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between a pair of wall parts, a part protruding from the inner side surface of one wall part is exemplified. In this case, by hooking the protruding portion onto the wiring, the resistance between the wiring and the connecting rod portion can be increased, and the displacement of the wiring in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and the misalignment suppressing portion projects from the one side wall portion toward the other side wall portion. A gaming machine C13 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and the positional deviation suppression portion is extended from one side wall portion to the other. Therefore, it is possible to form a portion where the wiring is hooked on the inner side surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, and to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion.

  In the gaming machine C13, the misregistration suppressing portion is provided continuously along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portion, and is alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C13, the positional deviation suppression portion is provided continuously along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portion and is alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions, so that only one side wall portion is provided. Compared with the case where the misregistration suppressing portion is formed, the wiring can be easily hooked on the misregistration suppressing portion.

  In the gaming machine C13 or C14, an interval between the misalignment suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed smaller than a thickness of the wiring, and the misalignment suppressing portion is elastically deformed in a direction away from the other side wall portion. A gaming machine C15 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C13 or C14, the gap between the misalignment suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the misalignment suppressing portion is separated from the other side wall portion. Therefore, when the wiring is inserted between the misalignment suppressing portion and the other side wall portion, the misalignment suppressing portion is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force causes the wiring to be connected to the side wall portion. It can be sandwiched between the position deviation suppressing portion. As a result, the wiring can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C12 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and the position deviation suppressing portion is provided near the support portion of the pair of side wall portions. A gaming machine C16 characterized in that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, and the support portions of the pair of side wall portions A misregistration suppressing portion is formed in the vicinity.

  In this case, since the wiring arranged around the support portion is restrained from being displaced in the vicinity of the support portion that is particularly easily displaced when the pair of connecting rod portions are rotated, the wiring is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress displacement along the direction.

  In addition, you may form a position shift suppression part by expanding the formation space | interval of a pair of side wall part in the vicinity of a support part. The wiring can be bent at a portion where the interval between the pair of side wall portions is widened. Therefore, when the pair of connecting rod portions rotate, the wiring slacks in the vicinity of the support portion, and accordingly, even if the wiring is likely to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, the wiring is curved at the misalignment suppressing portion. Thus, it is possible to absorb the sagging portion of the wiring near the support portion. Thereby, it can suppress that a wiring shifts in the longitudinal direction of a pair of side wall parts, and since wear of wiring can be controlled, durability of wiring can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C16, of the pair of arm members supported with each other, the one arm member extends toward the other arm member and the support portion is viewed in the axial direction. The gaming machine C17 is provided with an extending portion that overlaps with the other arm member, and the extending portion is formed so as to be able to contact the other arm member in the axial direction of the support portion.

  According to the gaming machine C17, the extending portion extending from one arm member toward the other arm member overlaps the other arm member in the axial direction of the support portion, and the other extension member in the axial direction of the support portion. It is formed so as to be able to contact the arm member.

  In this case, when one arm member is twisted in a direction in which the extended portion is brought close to the other arm member, the extended portion and the other arm member come into contact with each other, and the deformation resistance of the one arm member increases.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C16, the one arm member is deformed in such a manner that it is twisted in a direction in which the extending portion is brought close to the other arm member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress twisting deformation of the wiring disposed along the arm member. Thereby, durability of wiring is securable.

<An example of a technical idea for preventing positional deviation of a pair of arms of a member that is rotated by a parallel link>
A base plate, a pair of arm members pivotally supported at one end portion of the base plate, and the other end portions of the pair of arm members being parallel to the pivoting direction of the one end portion A moving member that is pivotally supported by a shaft and is movable between a first position and a second position that is different from the first position, and a driving force of the moving member In the gaming machine, wherein the pair of arm members form a parallel link, one arm member of the pair of arm members is disposed on a side surface in the swing axis direction. A gaming machine D1, wherein the bridge member is formed so as to be able to contact a side surface of the other arm member of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a moving member that is formed to be movable by being swung by a parallel link (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the pair of arm members forming the parallel link may be displaced in the swing axis direction while the moving member is rotating.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the bridge member fixed to the side surface in the swing axis direction of one arm member is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. . In this case, the movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction can be prevented by the bridge member, so that the positional deviation of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine D1, the bridge member always includes the side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction and the swing shaft while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine D2 including an overlapping portion that overlaps in a direction view.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, since the overlapping portion is always formed on the bridge member, the other arm member can always come into contact with the bridge member. Can be reliably prevented from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the driving device includes a transmission gear for transmitting a driving force to the one arm member, and the one end portion of the one arm member is a swing shaft of the one end portion. The gear teeth are formed in a circular arc shape centering on the transmission swing shaft, and includes a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear, and is disposed to face the base member of the one arm member. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the side face and the transmission gear are formed so as to be able to contact each other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the transmission gear is disposed between the one arm member and the base member, and the side surface disposed opposite to the base member of the one arm member is Since it can be brought into contact with the transmission gear, it is possible to prevent one end of one arm member from being displaced in the swing axis direction (posture change).

  Further, the side surface of the one arm member that is disposed opposite to the base member is brought into contact with the transmission gear, and the transmission gear is rotated, so that one end of the one arm member becomes the base member. The swing resistance of one arm member can be reduced as compared with the case of contact. For this reason, it is possible to achieve both prevention of displacement of one arm member in the swing axis direction and reduction of swing resistance.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the one arm member is formed with an area smaller than the area of the one end portion of the one arm member, and is disposed between the base member and the small arm member. A gaming machine D4 including an area member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the contact area between the base member and one arm member is reduced by the small area member, so that the swing of one arm member can be reduced. Dynamic resistance is reduced. Thereby, the drive force of a drive device can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D4, the small area member is formed in a shape having a longitudinal direction and a short direction formed shorter than the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is the one end of the one arm member. A gaming machine D5, which is fixed to the one arm member in a posture along a direction connecting the other end.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4, the small area member has one arm in a posture along the longitudinal direction in the direction connecting one end of the other arm and the other end. The contact range between the small-area member and the base member that is fixed to the member and extends along the direction connecting the one end of the one arm member and the other end is increased, so the other end of the one arm member Can approach or separate from the base member and improve the resistance to deformation of one arm member.

  In addition, by forming the small area member in a shape having a longitudinal direction and a short direction, the contact area between one arm member and the base member can be reduced as compared with a case where the small area member has a large diameter. Can do.

  In the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the small area member has an irregular shape including a main body circle formed with the diameter in the short-side direction and a line drawn from the end in the longitudinal direction to the main body circle. The straight line connecting the transmission swing shaft of the one arm member and the rotation shaft of the transmission gear always intersects the outer portion of the main body circle in the outer shape of the small area member. Game machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the main body circular portion formed by the diameter in the short direction of the small area member is the rotation of the transmission swing shaft and the transmission gear of one arm member. Since it always intersects with the straight line connecting the shaft, the straight line connecting the shafts from the longitudinal end of the small area member to the main body circle even if the distance between the small area member and the transmission gear is the same. Compared with the case where the line to be drawn intersects, the contact area between the transmission gear and the side surface of the one arm member on the base member side can be increased. Thereby, it can suppress that one arm member shifts a position in the swing axis direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the passive gear portion extends in the axial radial direction along the side surface on the opposite side of the transmission gear among the side surfaces in the swing axis direction, and the gear teeth of the passive gear portion are used. The transmission gear is formed in a two-stage gear shape in which gears are stacked in two stages, and the first gear part in the first stage includes the one arm member and the base. A second gear portion of the second stage is formed so as to be engaged with the passive gear portion and to be able to contact the umbrella portion in the rotation axis direction of the transmission gear. Characteristic gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects exerted on any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the transmission gear is formed of a two-stage gear, and the first gear portion of the two-stage gear is a base member of one arm member Since the second gear portion can be brought into contact with the umbrella portion of the passive gear portion, the contact position between the transmission gear and one arm member can be increased. Thereby, the wobble of one arm member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the first position is an overhang position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and the umbrella portion is formed on the one arm member in the radial direction of the passive gear portion. A support portion extending beyond an inter-axis distance between the transmission swing shaft and the rotation shaft of the transmission member, and the support portion includes the transmission gear in a state in which the moving member is disposed at the extended position; The gaming machine D8 is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface in the axial direction of the second gear portion.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D7, the support portion is the second gear portion of the transmission gear in a state where the moving member is disposed at the extended position and is most likely to move in the swing axis direction. Since it forms so that contact | abutting is possible, the movement to the rocking | fluctuation axis direction of one arm member can be suppressed by the contact | abutting.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridge member is supported at two points on the one arm member, and a straight line connecting the support points is 90 degrees larger than 0 degrees with the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. A gaming machine D9 characterized by forming a smaller predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridge member is supported by one arm member at two points, and a straight line connecting the supporting points is the longitudinal direction of the one arm member And a predetermined angle larger than 0 degree and smaller than 90 degrees, the load applied to one arm member when the other arm member and the bridging member come into contact with each other is rotated about the longitudinal direction of one arm member. The direction can be divided into a twist direction and a bending direction in which one arm member falls in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the degree of deformation of one arm member in one direction can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the bridge members are arranged in parallel in a longitudinal direction of the one arm member, and the pair of bridge members are substantially equal in distance from the one arm member. Of the pair of bridging members, one bridging member closer to the one end of the one arm member is closer to the other end of the one arm member. The gaming machine D10 is characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger than that of the other bridge member on the side.

  According to the gaming machine D10, a pair of bridging members are juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction of one arm member, and one of the bridging members is compared with the other bridging member. Thus, a large deformation resistance is formed. That is, one bridge member disposed on the side closer to the base member is more easily deformed than the other bridge member disposed on the side closer to the moving member.

  In the bending deformation of the other arm member, the one end portion pivotally supported by the base member is used as an axis, and the other end portion pivotally supported by the moving member is moved in the axial direction by the weight of the moving member. It happens by that. Therefore, when the pair of bridging members are formed with substantially the same distance from one arm member, the other arm member and the other bridging member are compared to one bridging member. Contact early.

  Here, when the deformation resistance of the other bridging member is as large as the deformation resistance of one bridging member, a situation occurs in which only the other bridging member receives the load from the other arm member alone, The durability of the bridge member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the other bridge member has a smaller deformation resistance than the one bridge member, and the other arm member When the other bridge member is deformed before it comes into contact with one of the bridge members, the pair of bridge members can receive a load from the other arm member. Therefore, since the load from the other arm member can be distributed and borne to the pair of bridge members, the durability of the pair of bridge members can be improved.

  As a method of reducing the deformation resistance of the other bridge member compared to the deformation resistance of one bridge member, the material of the other bridge member is changed to the material of the other bridge member. A method using a material having a lower rigidity is exemplified. If the material is the same, the method of reducing the section modulus of the other bridge member compared to the section modulus of one bridge member, or the method of forming reinforcing ribs on one bridge member Etc. are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D10, the bridge member is a columnar portion that is inserted through the one arm member, and is fixed to the one arm member, and is extended adjacent to the fixed portion. A non-rotating pin portion that is in contact with the one arm member on the seat surface in the extending direction thereof, and the one bridging member has the fixing portion that is the non-rotating pin portion. The other bridging member is arranged such that the fixing portion is arranged closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion. Game machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, the bridging member includes a fixed portion that is fixed to one arm member, and a detent pin portion that abuts the one arm member on the seat surface.

  One bridging member has a fixed portion disposed away from the other arm member than the detent pin portion (the detent pin portion is disposed between the fixed portion and the other arm member). . Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with one bridge member and the other bridge member turns over with the fixed portion as a starting point, the detent pin portion is separated from the one arm member.

  In contrast, in the other bridge member, the fixed portion is disposed closer to the other arm member than the non-rotating pin portion (the fixed portion is disposed between the non-rotating pin portion and the other arm member). Established). Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with the other bridge member and the other bridge member turns over from the fixed portion, the seating surface of the detent pin portion moves in a direction to be pressed against the one arm member. .

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the seating surface of the detent pin portion is pressed against one arm member and the deformation resistance increases, compared to one bridge member. The other bridge member can be more difficult to turn.

  Here, “turn over” means that the bridging member receives a force from the other arm member and is peeled off from the one arm member.

  In the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridge member is a columnar portion that is inserted through the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion that is fixed to the one arm member. A game characterized in that an embedding depth of the other bridging member into the one arm member is deeper than an embedding depth of the fixing portion into the one arm member. Machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridge member includes a fixing portion that is fixed to one arm member, and the embedding depth of the fixing portion in one arm member is Since the other bridge member is deeper than one bridge member, the other bridge member can be firmly fixed to one arm member compared to one bridge member, Compared to the bridge member, the other bridge member can be more difficult to turn.

  In any one of the gaming machines D10 to D12, the bridge member is a columnar portion that is inserted through the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion that is fixed to the one arm member. The length of the fixed portion of the other bridging member projecting from the side surface of the one arm member as compared to the length of the fixing portion of the one bridging member projecting from the side surface of the one arm member. A gaming machine D13 characterized in that is shorter.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D10 to D12, the bridging member has a fixing portion, and after the fixing portion is fixed to one arm member, the fixing portion is The length overhanging from the arm member is shorter than the other bridge member compared to the one bridge member, so the length of the other bridge member relative to one arm member is shorter than the one bridge member. Deformation resistance can be increased. Therefore, the other bridge member can be more difficult to turn than the one bridge member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D10 to D13, the other in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member as compared to the section modulus of the one bridging member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member The gaming machine D14 is characterized in that the cross-sectional modulus of the bridge member is larger.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D10 to D13, compared to the section modulus of one bridging member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member, from the other arm member Since the section modulus of the other bridge member in the direction of the applied load is formed larger, the deformation resistance of one bridge member is reduced due to the difference in shape between one bridge member and the other bridge member. In comparison, the deformation resistance of the other bridge member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D14, the bridging member includes a protruding portion that protrudes from a side surface that is in contact with the other arm member, and the protruding member includes the moving member that is the first member. When it is arranged at one position, it can be brought into contact with the other arm member, and when it is arranged at the second position, it cannot be brought into contact with the other arm member. A gaming machine D15 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D15, the protruding portion protrudes from the bridge member. The protruding portion can be brought into contact with the other arm member when the moving member is arranged at the first position, and can be brought into contact with the other arm member when the moving member is arranged at the second position. Impossible.

  Thereby, according to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D14, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the interval between the bridge member and the other arm member is increased. The projecting portion can be narrowed by an amount corresponding to the protruding portion, and the other arm member and the bridge member can be brought into contact with each other from the small deformation of the other arm member in the swing axis direction. On the other hand, when the moving member is disposed at the second position, a large interval between the bridge member and the other arm member is secured, and resistance when moving the moving member from the second position is increased. Can be suppressed.

  For example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the moving amount of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is large while the moving member is arranged at the second position. Is effective when the amount of movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is small enough to be ignored. That is, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, a load is applied from the moving member in a direction to bend the other arm member along the longitudinal direction, while the moving member is arranged at the second position. This is effective when a load is applied from the moving member in the direction of twisting the other arm member along the short direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member is larger than the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the one arm member. A gaming machine D16 characterized in that the side is formed narrower.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the portion that overlaps the side surface of the other arm member as compared to the width of the bridging member in the portion that overlaps the side surface of the one arm member The width of the bridging member is formed to be narrower, so that when the other arm member and the bridging member come into contact with each other and the bridging member is deformed, one arm member and the other arm member are connected in series. It is possible to prevent the bridging member from being twisted about the direction in which it moves.

  That is, the deformation of the bridge member can be easily limited to the bending deformation along the direction in which the one arm member and the other arm member are connected. Therefore, for example, when forming a portion that improves the deformation resistance against bending or twisting of the bridge member, the arrangement can be limited to a location where the resistance to bending deformation of the bridge member is increased. The structure of the member can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D16, when the moving member is disposed at at least one of the first position or the second position, the moving member is supported above the base member, and the center of gravity of the moving member Is formed at a position closer to the other arm member than the one arm member and at a position spaced from the other arm member on the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. A gaming machine D17, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine D17, the center of gravity of the moving member is closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and the other arm member is located on the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. It is formed at a position separated from. Therefore, when the moving member is supported above the base member, the weight of the moving member is applied to the other arm member more than the one arm member. In this case, the other arm member can be easily bent as compared with the one arm member.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D16, when the pair of arm members bends by the weight of the moving member, the other arm member is brought into contact with the bridge member. It can be made easier, and it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the pair of arm members due to the bending of one arm member toward the bridge member as compared with the other arm member.

<An example of the technical idea of irradiating light from the outside of the game area toward the inside of the game area>
A gaming machine comprising: a rail member that forms an outer frame of a game area; and an irradiation device that is disposed outside the rail member and that emits light toward the inside of the rail member, the irradiation device The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that light emitted from the vehicle travels on the back side of the rail member.

  There is a gaming machine that is arranged inside the game area in front view and that emits light from the back side of the game area, and that produces an effect by the irradiation apparatus (see, for example, JP 2012-081031 A) . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to prevent the irradiation device such as the LED from being exposed in front view in the inside of the game area, a cover member for blindfold is arranged on the front of the irradiation device. Since it is necessary to paint the board surface, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, an irradiation device that irradiates light inward of the game area through the back side of the rail member that forms the outer frame of the game area is disposed outside the rail member. Since it is possible to prevent an irradiation device such as an LED from being exposed and exposed inside the game area, the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  In addition, an irradiation apparatus arrange | positioned on the outer side of a game area | region can be made invisible from the front by arrange | positioning on the back side of board members, such as an outer edge member.

  In the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiating device is radiated toward the grand prize winning opening where the ball wins, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiating device is moved to the front side on the outer edge of the big winning prize opening. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that a direction changing portion for changing in a direction to face is formed.

  Here, when the irradiation device is disposed outside the rail member, in order to direct the irradiated light to the player side, it is necessary to direct the direction of the light of the irradiation device toward the front side, Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device in the direction toward the front side. Therefore, a change member that reflects the light emitted from the irradiation device and changes the traveling direction in the direction toward the front side is required, and the change member is disposed inside the game area. In this case, in order to prevent the change member from being exposed in front view, it may be necessary to arrange a cover member for blindfold on the front of the change member or to paint the board surface. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area was reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is emitted toward the big winning opening, and the outer edge of the big winning opening is emitted from the irradiation device. A direction change part that changes the light traveling direction to the front side is formed, but the outer edge of the big prize opening is the part that the player aims to win the ball, and it can be exposed in front view Since it is a possible part, a cover member for blindfolding or the like can be omitted, and the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the direction change portion is formed at the outer edge of the winning prize opening, the wall surface of the opening of the winning prize opening is formed at an angle that allows the light emitted from the irradiation device to be reflected toward the front side. And an aspect in which the upper lid member that opens and closes the special winning opening is formed so as to be inclined at an angle capable of reflecting the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side.

  In the gaming machine E2, it is possible to form a closed state that closes the flow path of the sphere to the prize winning opening and an open state that opens the flow path of the sphere to the prize winning opening, and the outer edge of the big prize opening An upper lid member to be formed, and the upper lid member includes the direction changing portion, and in the state where the upper lid member forms the closed state or the open state, the direction changing portion includes the direction changing portion. A gaming machine E3 in which the light emitted from the irradiation device arrives.

  Here, it is difficult to dispose an irradiation device such as an LED on the upper lid member disposed in the winning prize opening because the upper lid member is increased in size. Therefore, it is difficult to cause the upper lid member to emit light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the direction changing unit that directs the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device to the front side includes the closed state and the opened state of the special winning opening. And is formed on the upper lid member that forms the outer edge of the winning prize opening, so that the player can visually recognize the direction change portion of the upper lid member to emit light, and the upper lid member is prevented from becoming large. However, it is possible to improve the ability of the upper lid member as a production part.

  In addition, since the state of the upper lid member is switched, whether or not the light reaches the direction changing portion changes, so it is confirmed whether or not the direction changing portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to confirm whether the big prize opening is open or closed. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the special winning opening.

  In addition, as an aspect in which whether or not the light reaches the direction change part by changing the state of the upper lid member, an aspect in which a member capable of shielding light before reaching the direction change part is disposed, Examples include a mode in which the output of the irradiation device is turned on / off in accordance with the switching of the state of the upper lid member.

  Examples of the form of the upper lid member include an aspect in which the sliding operation is performed in the front-rear direction of the game area, and an aspect in which the pair of opposing long plate members are oscillated on an axis parallel to the front-rear direction.

  The gaming machine E3 includes a shielding portion formed so as to be able to shield the light emitted from the irradiation device, and the irradiation device irradiates when the big prize opening forms one of the open state or the closed state. When the light reaches the direction changing portion and the winning prize port forms the other of the open state or the closed state, the light irradiated from the irradiation device toward the direction changing portion is shielded by the shielding portion. A gaming machine E4 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the shielding portion is formed in a mode capable of shielding the light emitted from the irradiation device, and depending on whether the big prize opening is closed or opened. Whether the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction change portion reaches the direction change portion or whether the light reaches the direction change portion by arranging a shielding portion between the irradiation device and the direction change portion. Therefore, it is possible to change the state in which the direction changing portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized only by the operation required for continuing the game on the upper lid member. Therefore, the upper lid member can be used for both the role of controlling the passage of the ball to the big prize opening and the role of performing the effect by the light emitted from the irradiation device.

  Examples of the shielding portion include a metal rail member that partitions the game area, a painted portion painted on the board surface of the game board, and a decorative board that projects from the board surface of the game board to the front side. That is, when the shielding portion is formed of a rail member, the rail member is used for both the purpose of forming the outer frame of the game area and the purpose of the shielding portion.

  In the gaming machine E3 or E4, the gaming machine E3 or E4 includes a front plate member that is disposed on the front side of the prize winning opening and that reaches the direction changing portion and that has traveled in a changing direction. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it is formed so as to cover the grand prize winning opening in a front view, and the direction changing portion condenses light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which a front plate member is disposed on the front side of the special winning opening, and the front plate member covers the special winning opening in a front view. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the inside of the big prize opening from being visually recognized, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of design inside the big prize opening. On the other hand, in this case, the light irradiated from the irradiation device to the grand prize winning opening is visually recognized through the front plate member, so it is necessary to increase the intensity of the light in order to maintain the effect of the light irradiated from the irradiation device. There is a problem that usable irradiation devices are limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the direction changing portion that changes the traveling direction of the light toward the front plate member collects light at a predetermined portion of the front plate member. Since it is made to light, the intensity | strength of the light which reaches | attains the predetermined part of a front board member can be raised, without changing an irradiation apparatus.

  In addition, as a mode which condenses light, a mode in which a direction change part is formed in a U shape and the side which faces a front plate member is opened, or a side where a direction change part is formed in a parabolic shape and faces a front plate member is opened The mode etc. which are performed are illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, when the grand prize opening forms the open state, the light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and the ball that has won the grand prize opening, The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the light irradiated from the irradiation device is blocked from reaching the direction changing portion by crossing the light irradiated from the irradiation device.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, when the big prize opening is opened, the light irradiated from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and the big prize opening Since the sphere that won the prize crosses the light irradiated from the irradiation device to prevent the light irradiated from the irradiation device from reaching the direction changing portion, whether the direction changing portion is viewed brightly or darkly , It can be confirmed that the ball has won the grand prize. As a result, for example, even if the grand prize opening is not visible in front view, it is possible to confirm that the ball has won the big prize opening by visually recognizing the light emitted from the irradiation device. There is no need to look into the winning opening from obliquely above, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Here, for example, when the light irradiation direction faces the flow direction of the sphere, the light is shielded by the first sphere regardless of whether one sphere wins the winning prize opening or multiple wins. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the number of winning spheres with light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the sphere traverses the light irradiated from the irradiation device. Unlike the case of flowing down along the irradiation direction, the light irradiated from the irradiation device is shielded for each sphere won in the big prize opening. As a result, even when balls are awarded in succession at the winning a prize opening, it is possible to block the light for each ball and to determine the number of balls awarded to the winning a prize opening by light.

  In addition, since the sphere crosses the light, the sphere that won the winning a prize opening is compared to the case where the flow direction of the sphere and the traveling direction of the light face each other or when the sphere flows along the light irradiation direction. Since the period during which the light is shielded can be shortened and the period during which the direction change portion is viewed brightly can be lengthened, the performance capability of the direction change portion can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine E6, the gaming machine E6 includes a front plate member that is disposed on the front side of the prize winning opening and that reaches the direction changing portion and that has changed its traveling direction, and the direction changing portion includes the front plate. A gaming machine E7, wherein the light is condensed on a predetermined portion of the member, and the irradiation device is formed in a mode of irradiating light from a plurality of locations, and a sphere individually traverses the light irradiated from each location. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E6, provided with a front plate member that is disposed on the front side of the big prize opening and reaches the direction changing portion and the light whose traveling direction has changed reaches, The direction changing unit condenses the light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member.For example, when light of multiple colors is irradiated from the irradiation device, the light of the actually irradiated color and the light of each color are combined. The colored light can be visually recognized through the front plate member.

  In addition, the irradiation device is formed in such a manner that light is emitted from a plurality of locations, and since the sphere individually traverses the light emitted from each location, the light emitted to the front plate member in accordance with the timing when the sphere flows down The aspect of can be changed.

  For example, consider a case where the irradiating apparatus includes a pair of portions that emit light, and one portion emits “blue” light and the other portion emits “red” light. In this case, the light condensed on the front plate member can be visually recognized as “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red”.

  Here, if the sphere flows down in a manner that crosses the light irradiated from one place and shields the light, the “blue” light will be shielded, so the “red” color is applied to the front plate member. Only the light of is visible.

  On the other hand, if the sphere flows down in a manner that crosses the light emitted from the other part and shields the light, the “red” light will be shielded. Only light is visible.

  Thus, the aspect of the light visually recognized by the front plate member can be changed depending on from which part the sphere shields the light irradiated. The change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area along a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, so that the change in the light mode can be generated at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change in the mode of light emitted from the irradiation device is caused by electronic control, it is possible to produce a more random effect and improve the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines E2 to E7, the special winning opening is disposed below the center of the gaming area, and the lower edge of the special winning opening is formed by the lower edge of the rail member. Machine E8.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a big prize opening is provided below a liquid crystal display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, an out port is formed at the lower edge of the game area, and a liquid crystal display device is formed above the large winning port arranged above the gaming port. This prevents the driving device from lowering the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device, and hinders the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, the opening lower side of the big prize opening is formed by the lower edge of the rail member. In this case, by forming the opening with reference to the lowest point of the rail member, the left and right ends of the opening can be formed to protrude downward from the game area, compared to the case where the lower side of the opening is formed in a straight line, The big prize opening can be formed in a space-saving manner.

  In addition, the position of the drive device configured on the back of the large winning opening is lowered by arranging the large winning opening in a region including the lower edge of the rail member, which is generally a place where the out opening is disposed. Accordingly, the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered.

  In the gaming machine E8, a first out port that is disposed on one side in the left-right direction of the grand prize opening and a ball that is disposed on the other side in the left and right direction of the grand prize port is disposed on the other side of the game. A second outlet opening for discharging out of the area; a closed state disposed above the grand prize winning opening and closing a flow path of the sphere to the special winning opening; and a flow path of the sphere to the special winning opening. An upper lid member capable of forming an open state to be opened, and upper sides of the first out port and the second out port are formed above an upper side surface of an end portion of the upper lid member and the first lid The lower side of the out-port and the second out-port is formed below the upper surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, so that the first out along the upper surface of the upper lid member in the closed state of the prize winning port. That the ball is allowed to flow to the mouth or the second out mouth. Game machine E9 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8, the upper sides of the first out port and the second out port are formed above the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, and the first out port and the second out port are formed. Since the lower side of the out port is formed below the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, it is possible to discharge the ball from the first out port or the second out port, and the upper lid member is moved to the first out port. And it can be lowered to the same position as the second out port.

  In the gaming machine E9, the upper surface of the upper lid member is formed in a shape that is inclined downward in both the left and right directions.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9, the upper side surface of the upper lid member is formed in a shape that slopes downward in both the left and right directions, so that the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the big prize opening can be suppressed. it can. As a result, the nail that is formed in the game area and allows the ball to flow down toward the big prize opening can be translated downward, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered downward.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, the upper lid member is formed with a plurality of ribs protruding from the lower surface.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, a rib is formed on the lower surface of the upper lid member to increase the rigidity of the upper lid member and prevent the upper lid member from falling down due to the weight of the ball can do.

  In the gaming machine E11, of the plurality of ribs, the rib formed inside the special winning opening is formed on a back side of the gaming area in a state where the upper lid member forms the closed state. A gaming machine E12 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E11, the rib formed on the inside of the big prize opening is formed on the back side of the gaming area in a state where the upper lid member forms the closed state, so that the ball is It is possible to secure a sufficient vertical width in which the ball is arranged below the upper lid member and the balls are arranged on the front side of the big prize opening. That is, it is possible to prevent the rib and the sphere from interfering with each other.

  In any one of the gaming machines E9 to E12, before the ball flowing down toward the first out port or the second out port reaches the first out port or the second out port, the direction of the ball is changed to the first direction. A gaming machine E13 provided with a ball direction adjusting portion directed toward the opening direction of the first out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E9 to E12, the direction of the sphere is directed to the opening direction of the first out port or the second out port by the ball direction adjusting unit. It can be made easy to discharge to the 1 out port or the 2nd out port. Thereby, since the opening width of the 1st out mouth or the 2nd out mouth can be controlled, when the big prize opening, the 1st out mouth, and the 2nd out mouth are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction, those arrangement positions are changed. The game area can be lowered below.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a direction changing unit that changes a traveling direction of light emitted from the irradiation device in a direction toward the front side, and a board surface forming a back surface of the gaming area is formed of a transparent resin, and the direction change The gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the portion is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface.

  Here, when the irradiation device is disposed outside the rail member, in order to direct the irradiated light to the player side, it is necessary to direct the direction of the light of the irradiation device toward the front side, Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device in the direction toward the front side. Therefore, a change member that reflects the light emitted from the irradiation device and changes the traveling direction in the direction toward the front side is required, and the change member is disposed inside the game area. In this case, in order to prevent the change member from being exposed in front view, it may be necessary to arrange a cover member for blindfold on the front of the change member or to paint the board surface. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area was reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the board surface forming the back surface of the gaming area is formed of a transparent resin, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device faces the front side. Since the direction change part that changes in the direction is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface, even when the direction change part is visible in front view, it is not noticeable and has an effect on the decoration of the game area Can be reduced. Thereby, the design freedom of the decoration of a game area can be improved.

  As a mode in which the direction change part is formed on the board surface, a mode in which the board surface is cut, a mode in which the board surface is drilled, a mode in which a nail is screwed into the board surface, or a direction change part in the resin mold of the board surface The method etc. which form a recessed part in a molded article by forming the protrusion corresponding to are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E14, the light emitted from the irradiation device, the direction of travel of which is changed by the direction changing unit, is irradiated from below onto a member protruding from the board surface. Game machine E15.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E13, the light emitted from the irradiation device, the direction of travel of which is changed by the direction changing portion, is applied to the member protruding from the board surface from below. Since it is irradiated, the shadow formed below the member protruding from the board surface can be brightened by the light irradiated from the irradiation device by illumination of the hall. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering performance of the area below the member protruding from the board surface, and to make the sphere easier to see when the ball passes through the area below the member protruding from the board surface. Therefore, it is possible to ease the burden felt by the player because it is difficult to see the ball.

  Examples of the member protruding from the board surface include a nail, a windmill, and a through gate.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a base plate, a pair of arm members pivotally supported on one end portion of the base plate so as to be swingable, and the other end portion of the pair of arm members being the one end. The shaft is pivotally supported by an axis parallel to the axial support direction of the end of the shaft, and is configured to be movable between a first position and a second position that is different from the first position. In a gaming machine comprising a moving member and a driving device for generating a driving force of the moving member, wherein the pair of arm members form a parallel link, one arm member of the pair of arm members is A bridge member is provided on a side surface in the swing axis direction, and the bridge member is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface in the swing axis direction of the other arm member of the pair of arm members. The
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the bridging member is always the other member while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position. The arm member includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the side surface of the arm member in the direction of the swing axis when viewed in the direction of the swing axis.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the driving device includes a transmission gear that transmits a driving force to the one arm member. The one end portion is a portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centering on a transmission swing shaft that is a swing shaft of the one end portion, and a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear The side surface of the one arm member that is disposed to face the base member and the transmission gear are formed so as to be in contact with each other.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the displacement of the moving member can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the moving member regardless of the arrangement of the moving member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the displacement of the moving member can be reliably suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13, 8013 Game board 61 Inner rail (rail member)
62 Outer rail (rail member)
65a Special prize opening (big prize opening)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
210 Back Case 311c Sphere Flow Rib (Sphere Orientation Adjustment Unit)
314 Out port (1st out port, 2nd out port)
320 Front plate member 321a Sphere flow rib (spherical adjustment part)
331c Light irradiation device (irradiation device)
332 Moving upper lid member (upper lid member)
332a1f Front side inclined side surface (direction changing part)
332a3 Guide rib (part of rib)
332c Center rib (part of rib)
410 Main body member (moving member, first moving member)
416 Shaft support (first support part)
421 Swing base member (part of second moving member)
421c Insertion shaft (one end)
422 Decorative member (part of second moving member)
423, 5423 connecting member 423b bent portion (intermediate portion)
423c Shaft support rod (second support part)
423e Slide shaft (the other end)
424, 5424 Guide plate (base member)
424b, 4424b Guide hole (guide route)
430 Swing member (auxiliary member)
440 Leg member (part of slide mechanism)
460 Driving device 480, 9480 Wiring guide arm (wiring auxiliary member)
481, 9481 First guide arm (arm member)
481a Plate arm (part of connecting rod, side wall)
481a1 Notch (recessed part)
481b One side cylindrical part (support part)
481c Other side cylindrical part (support part)
481c1 Expanded part (second non-contact part)
481d Attached part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part)
481d1 Arc-shaped attachment (wall)
481e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
481e2 Other side bottom (shaft bottom)
482, 9482 Second guide arm (arm member)
482a Plate-like arm (part of connecting rod, side wall)
482a1 Arc-shaped plate (wall)
482a2 Notch (recessed part)
482b One side cylindrical part (support part)
482b1 reduced diameter part (first non-contact part)
482c Other side cylindrical part (support part)
482d Attached part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part)
482e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
482e1 One side bottom (shaft bottom)
483 Third guide arm (arm member)
510, 3510 Base member (base plate)
520, 2520, 3520, 7520 Driving side arm member ( supported means )
523 Gear part (passive gear part)
523a Umbrella 525 Color member (small area member)
525a Body part (body circle)
528, 2528, 7528 Bridge member 528a, 7528a First bridge member (the other bridge member)
528a2 insertion part (fixed part)
528a3 Auxiliary protrusion (rotating pin part)
528a4 Rib part (projecting part)
528b, 7528b Second bridge member (one bridge member)
528b2 insertion part (fixed part)
528b3 Auxiliary protrusion (rotating pin part)
528b4 Rib part (projecting part)
530, 7530 Drive side arm member (arm member)
540 Moving member 550 Drive device 553 Transmission gear 553a First gear portion 553b Second gear portion 3523b Overhang portion (support portion)
4424c Recessed part (braking part)
5425b2 2nd inclined surface (braking part)
6480 Wiring guide slide (wiring auxiliary member)
8013c Direction change part 8610 Light irradiation apparatus (irradiation apparatus)
9481d1 Fitting recess (Fitting recess)
9481f Desorption front locking member (front locking member)
9481f2 fitting arm (arm)
9481g Non-slip plate part (positional deviation suppression part)
9481h Auxiliary bottom on the other side (extension part)
9482f Overhang front locking part (extension part)
9482g Non-slip plate part (positional deviation suppression part)
C Color member (lid member)
N Rib (Position displacement suppression part)
W wiring

Claims (2)

A base member, a Hijiku支means having one end portion is swingably supported on the base member, is disposed at the other end of the Hijiku支means between a first position, the first a moving member formed to be movable between the second position is a position different from the position, a drive device for generating a driving force of the moving member, in Bei obtain gaming machine,
The driving device includes a transmission gear for transmitting a driving force to the pivoted support means,
The one end portion of the pivotally supported means is a portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape around the swing shaft of the one end portion, and a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear With
Said side surface and said transmission gear is disposed opposite to the base member of the rotatably supported means, characterized Rukoto includes an abutment can become part due to that the object journalled means is moved in the direction of the oscillation axis A gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising light emitting means for emitting light .

Images